idu hardware description(v100r002c00_03).pdf
TRANSCRIPT
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 1/496
OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
V100R002C00
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03
Date 2010-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 2/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 3/496
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 4/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 5/496
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 950 V100R002C00
iManager U2000 V100R001C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer
l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication
l Basics of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 6/496
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK .
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00
This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Section Description
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and
lower-order bits of DIP switches.
3.5.2 Functions and Features Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on
the IF1 board.
GUI Conventions
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 7/496
Section Description
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment Adds descriptions of requirements for the
diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types of
coaxial connectors, and crimp pliers.
- Fixes known bugs.
Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00
This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Section Description
D Glossary Adds certain terms.
E Acronyms and Abbreviations Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.
Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00
This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Update History
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 8/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 9/496
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-31.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appear ance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CST..................................................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.3 Wor king Principle..................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-11
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-17
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-20
3.3.7 Boar d Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-21
3.4 CSH...............................................................................................................................................................3-223.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-23
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-23
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-25
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-28
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-35
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-37
3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-38
3.4.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-38
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-40
3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-40
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 10/496
3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-40
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-42
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-47
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-49
3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-50
3.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-50
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-52
3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-52
3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-52
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-54
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-57
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-60
3.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-61
3.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-61
3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-62
3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-63
3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-63
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-64
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-68
3.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-71
3.7.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-72
3.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-72
3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-733.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-74
3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-74
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-76
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-79
3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-83
3.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-84
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-84
3.8.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-84
3.9 SL1D.............................................................................................................................................................3-86
3.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-87
3.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-87
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-88
3.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-91
3.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-93
3.9.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-94
3.9.7 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-94
3.9.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-94
3.10 SP3S/SP3D..................................................................................................................................................3-95
3.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-96
Contents
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 11/496
3.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-96
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-97
3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-99
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-103
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-104
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-104
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-104
3.11 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-105
3.11.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-105
3.11.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-106
3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-106
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-107
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-110
3.11.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-1113.12 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-112
3.12.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-112
3.12.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-113
3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-113
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-114
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-115
3.12.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-116
3.13 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-116
3.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-117
3.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-117
3.13.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-117
3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-118
3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-120
3.13.6 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-120
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 IDU PG ND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 IF Jumper .........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 12/496
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment ...................................................................................................5-10
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-15
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-17
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-18
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45
A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59
Contents
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 13/496
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-88
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93
A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 14/496
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-178
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187
A.10 Parameters f or the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-189
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199
A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232
A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237
A.13 Parameters f or the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243
A.14 Parameters f or Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254
Contents
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 15/496
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281
A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1
D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1
E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 16/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 17/496
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950........................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950......................................1-3
Figure 1-3 IDU 950..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-5 Se parate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 950 labels..........................................................................................................2-4
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST.................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-10
Figure 3-6 Fr ont panel of the CST.....................................................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-7 Fr ont view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-13Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the NE interface...............................3-15
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ......................................................................................3-18
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis...............................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-11 Logical slot for the logical board of the CST.................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH............................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-28
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH...................................................................................................................3-29
Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-31
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the NE interface.............................3-32
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-35
Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis...............................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-19 Logical slot for the logical board of the CSH.................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-42
Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-47
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-49
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-50
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2...........................................................................................3-54
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-57
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-60
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Figures
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 18/496
Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-60
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-65
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-71
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-71
Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-77
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-79
Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-79
Figure 3-35 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-81
Figure 3-36 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis............................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F................................................................3-83
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram of the SL1D.......................................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the SL1D.................................................................................................................3-91
Figure 3-40 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis............................................................................................3-93
Figure 3-41 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D............................................................................3-93
Figure 3-42 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D.................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the SP3S..................................................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-44 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-100
Figure 3-45 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-101
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 950 chassis.........................................................................3-103
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SP3S/SP3D................................................................3-103
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-106
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-107Figure 3-50 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...............................................................................................3-108
Figure 3-51 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-110
Figure 3-52 Logical slots for the logical boards of the AUX...........................................................................3-110
Figure 3-53 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-113
Figure 3-54 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-114
Figure 3-55 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-115
Figure 3-56 Logical slots for the logical boards of the PIU.............................................................................3-116
Figure 3-57 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-58 Front Panel Diagram.....................................................................................................................3-119
Figure 3-59 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-120
Figure 3-60 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-120
Figure 4-1 Fr ont panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Fr ont panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4
Figures
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 19/496
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-14
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Figures
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 20/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 21/496
Tables
Table 1-1 Intr oduction of the IDU 950.................................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 RT N 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950.............................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 RT N XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Radio link forms of the OptiX RTN 950.............................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CST...........................................................................................3-11
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the CSH...............................3-12
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-14
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-14
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD1 interface......................................................................................3-15
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the TOD2 interface...............................................................................................3-16
Table 3-9 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................... 3-18Table 3-10 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-11 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-21
Table 3-12 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-22
Table 3-13 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-22
Table 3-14 Description of the indicators on the CSH........................................................................................ 3-29
Table 3-15 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the CSH.............................3-30
Table 3-16 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-31
Table 3-17 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-31
Table 3-18 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-32
Table 3-19 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD1 interface....................................................................................3-33
Table 3-20 Pin assignment of the TOD2 interface.............................................................................................3-34
Table 3-21 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-36
Table 3-22 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-38
Table 3-23 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-39
Table 3-24 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-39
Table 3-25 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-39
Table 3-26 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-43
Table 3-27 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-46
Table 3-28 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-47
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Tables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 22/496
Table 3-29 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-48
Table 3-30 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-50
Table 3-31 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-51
Table 3-32 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-51
Table 3-33 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-51
Table 3-34 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-55
Table 3-35 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-56
Table 3-36 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-58
Table 3-37 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-59
Table 3-38 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-60
Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-61
Table 3-40 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-62
Table 3-41 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-62
Table 3-42 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-65
Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-67
Table 3-44 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-69
Table 3-45 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-70
Table 3-46 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-72
Table 3-47 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-72
Table 3-48 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-73
Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-73
Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction...............................................................................3-77
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-78Table 3-52 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..........................................................................3-79
Table 3-53 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-81
Table 3-54 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-81
Table 3-55 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-82
Table 3-56 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-83
Table 3-57 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F..........................................................................................3-84
Table 3-58 Board feature code of the EM6F......................................................................................................3-84
Table 3-59 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-85
Table 3-60 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-85
Table 3-61 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-86
Table 3-62 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-86
Table 3-63 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D...........................................................3-89
Table 3-64 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-90
Table 3-65 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.......................................................................................3-91
Table 3-66 Description of the interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-92
Table 3-67 Slot allocation for the SL1D............................................................................................................3-93
Table 3-68 Board feature code of the SL1D.......................................................................................................3-94
Table 3-69 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-94
Table 3-70 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-95
Tables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 23/496
Table 3-71 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D.................................................3-98
Table 3-72 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D............................................... 3-98
Table 3-73 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................3-100
Table 3-74 Description of the interface on the SP3S.......................................................................................3-100
Table 3-75 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D.....................................................................................3-101
Table 3-76 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-101
Table 3-77 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................................3-104
Table 3-78 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................................3-104
Table 3-79 E1 interface performance...............................................................................................................3-104
Table 3-80 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-105
Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the AUX......................................................................................3-108
Table 3-82 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces..............................................3-108
Table 3-83 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface............................................................................................3-109
Table 3-84 Pin assignment of the ALMI interface...........................................................................................3-109
Table 3-85 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface.........................................................................................3-109
Table 3-86 Slot configuration for the AUX......................................................................................................3-110
Table 3-87 Orderwire interface performance...................................................................................................3-111
Table 3-88 Synchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-111
Table 3-89 Asynchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-111
Table 3-90 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-91 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................3-115
Table 3-92 Description of the interfaces on the PIU........................................................................................3-115
Table 3-93 Technical specifications.................................................................................................................3-116Table 3-94 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed.............................................................................................3-118
Table 3-95 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................3-119
Table 3-96 Technical specifications for the FAN.............................................................................................3-120
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Ty pes of fiber jumpers................................................................................................ .........................5-7
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................ 5-14
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.......... 5-16
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface................................................................................................. 5-18
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable................................................................................... 5-20
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable............................................................................................. 5-20
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275
Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description Tables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 24/496
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CST...........................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSH...........................................................................................C-2
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-3
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-6
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-7
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-8
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the AUX..........................................................................................C-9
Table C-9 Description of the power status indicators ........................................................................................C-9
Table C-10 Description of the fan status indicators............................................................................................C-9
Table C-11 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-10
Tables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 25/496
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 950 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission
system.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or pr ivate network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Forms
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms by flexibly configuring different
IF boards and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 26/496
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the
OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriate
type based on the actual requirements.
The OptiX RTN 950 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and
flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,
Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the
smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid
microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes thatoccur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission
requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid
microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 950 for the
mobile communication network.
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
OptiX RTN 950 BTS BSC
E1
E1
E1
STM-1/E1 E1Regional Backhaul
Network
E1 E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 27/496
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
Regional backhaulnetwork
OptiX RTN 950 BTSNodeB BSCRNC
FE
E1
FE
E1
E1
E1FE
FE/GE
E1
GE
E1
E1
STM-1/E1
FE
NOTE
l In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 950 can be connected to the RNC
or the BSC directly.
1.2 ComponentsThe OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 950
The IDU 950 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 950 system. It accesses services, performs
multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and
communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 950
Item Performance
Chassis height 2U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1-6
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 28/496
Item Performance
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration
N+0 non-protection configuration (N ≤ 5)
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N ≤ 4)
XPIC configuration
Figure 1-3 IDU 950
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Item Description
Standard Power ODU High Power ODU
ODU type SP and SPA HP
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38
GHz (SP ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz
(SPA ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/32/38
GHz
1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 29/496
Item Description
Standard Power ODU High Power ODU
Microwave modulation
mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM(SP ODU)
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM (SPA
ODU)
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/56 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Item Description
High Power ODU
ODU type XMC-2
Frequency band 15/23 GHz
Microwave modulation mode QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/
256QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28/56 MHz
Antenna
The OptiX RTN 950 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-
polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the
corresponding feeder system.
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and single-
polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, theODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting
method.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 30/496
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter
and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting
1.3 Radio Link Forms
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms by flexibly configuring different
IF boards and ODUs to meet the requirements of different microwave application scenarios.
1 Introduction
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 31/496
Table 1-4 Radio link forms of the OptiX RTN 950
Radio Link Form Type of theControl,Switching, and
Timing Board
Type of the IFBoard
Type of the ODU
SDH/PDH radio link CST/CSH IF1 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Hybrid radio link CSH IFU2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Hybrid radio link that
supports the XPIC
CSH IFX2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-7
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 32/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 33/496
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore
can be deployed flexibly.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions of the IDU 950 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 88 mm (height). The
IDU 950 has a four-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
2.3 IDU Labels
There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 34/496
2.1 Chassis StructureThe dimensions of the IDU 950 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 88 mm (height). The
IDU 950 has a four-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950
2.2 Installation ModeThe IDU 950 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
The IDU 950 can be installed:
l In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In an open rack
l On a wall
l On a table
2.3 IDU LabelsThere are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
2 Chassis
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 35/496
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU
chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and
boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning
label
warns you not to
touch the fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High
temperature
warning label
The board surface
temperature may
exceed 70°C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55°C. Inthis case, you need
to wear protective
gloves before
handling the board.
合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD
华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE INCHINAHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification
card label
Indicates that the
equipment is
qualified.
RoHS label Indicates that the
equipmentcomplies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 36/496
Label Label Name Description
Product
nameplate label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
PULL
Operation
guidance label
The switch lever
must be pulled
outwards slightly
before setting the
switch to the "I" or
"O" position.
Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 950 labels
合格证/QUALIFICATIONCARD
华为技术有限公司 中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
WARNING
-48V OUTPUTTURNOFF POWERBEFORE
DISCONNECTINGIF CABLE
!
ThisdevicecomplieswithPart15oftheFCCRules.Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:(1)thisdevicemaynotcauseharmfulinterference,and(2)thisdevicemustacceptanyinterferencereceived,
includinginterferencethatmaycauseundesiredoperation.
OptiXRTN950
POWERRATING: -48 -60V;14.3A
华为技术有限公司 中国制造
电源额定值
H UA WE I T EC HN OL GI ES C O ., LT D. M AD E IN C HI NA
N 14036
Class 1 LaserProduct
2 Chassis
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 37/496
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70
mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect unit,
and timing board in the IDU 950 are 22.36 mm (height) x 199.60 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width).
3.2 Board ListThe boards ar e inserted in the IDU 950. The IDU 950 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control and communication, switching, and clock board.
3.4 CSH
The CSH is an Hybrid system control, cross-connect, and timing board.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distributionmodes.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces andtwo GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 38/496
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
3.9 SL1DThe SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.11 AUX
The AUX is the auxiliary and management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can
house only one AUX.
3.12 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.13 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 39/496
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70
mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect unit,
and timing board in the IDU 950 are 22.36 mm (height) x 199.60 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width).
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 950 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)
The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two
ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or
removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached
to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
②
Internal code
③
④
Board version
Board name
Board feature code
①
0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01
① ② ③ ④
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 40/496
NOTE
The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface
board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board
indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see the
description of each board in this document.
3.2 Board List
The boards are inserted in the IDU 950. The IDU 950 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot9
(PIU)
Slot 7 (CST/CSH)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST/CSH)Slot
10
(PIU) Slot
11
(FAN)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.
Table 3-1 List of IDUs
BoardName FullSpelling Valid Slot Description
CST TDM
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Slot 7 or slot
8
l Provides full timeslot cross-connections
for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent
to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Performs system communication and
control.
l Provides the clock processing function and
supports one external clock input/output
function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE cascading
interface.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 41/496
BoardName
FullSpelling Valid Slot Description
CSH Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Slot 7 or slot
8
l Provides full timeslot cross-connections
for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent
to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching
capability.
l Performs system communication and
control.
l Provides the clock processing function and
supports one external clock input/output
function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE cascading
interface.
IF1 SDH IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave
solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
IFU2 Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.
l Supports AM.
IFX2 Universal
XPIC IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid
microwave.
l Supports the AM of the Hybrid
microwave.
SL1D 2xSTM-1
interface
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
optical interfaces.
EM6T 6 Port RJ45
Ethernet/
GigabitEthernet
Interface
Board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
are compatible with the FE electricalinterface.
EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +
2 Port SFP
Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with
the FE electrical interfaces.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 42/496
BoardName
FullSpelling Valid Slot Description
SP3S 16xE1
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
SP3D 32xE1
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1
interfaces.
AUX Auxiliary
interface
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides one orderwire interface, one
asynchronous data interface, one
synchronous data interface, and four-input
and two-output external alarm interfaces.
TND1PIU Power board Slot 9 or slot
10
Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
TND1FAN Fan board Slot 11 Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control and communication, switching, and clock board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CST provides the time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. In addition, the CST provides the auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CST comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front
panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
the NMS should be the same as the physical slot.
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
3.3.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection performance, clock
performance, wayside service interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 43/496
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CST provides the time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. In addition, the CST provides the auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces.
Cross-Connection
l Grooms TDM service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication
l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and provides up to 14 DCC channels.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, PDH tributary
clock or microwave air interface link clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the timing loop and switching between the clock of the main system and the clock
of the standby system. In addition, no bit errors should occur in the services in the case of
a normal clock switching.
l Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the board
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 44/496
Protection Processing
l Supports the 1+1 hot backup for the system control unit, cross-connect unit, and clock unit.
Hence, the system automatically switches over to the standby system control and
communication board when the main system control and communication board is faulty.
l Performs the 1+1 and N+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performancethresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the board reset.
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the
-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and the backup of the configuration data.
The backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an
on-site board replacement.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CST comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 45/496
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST
Backplane
System control
and
communication
unit
Cross-connect
unit
Power
supply
unit
Clock unit
Clock signal required
by other boards
External clock signal
Clock interface
Control bus
TDM service
-48 V1
-48 V2
Supplies power to
the other units on
the board
Clock signal
to other units
on the board
+12 V power supplied
to the fans
+3.3 V power supplied to
other boards
NE cascade
interface
NM interface
NM serial
interface
FE signal System control and
communication unit
Clock unit
Time interface 1
Time
interface 2
Service board
System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, CPUunit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 46/496
– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
– Adds or drops the orderwire, synchronous data and asynchronous data services.
– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
l The system control and communication unit on the board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired board by carrying the FE signal over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the 1+1 hot backup between the paired
boards is realized.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
Sink TDMservice unit
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit
provides the system clock.
l The main and standby boards transmit the clock to each other.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 47/496
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons, and labels on the front
panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST
C S T
S T A T
P R O G
S Y N C
A C T
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2CF RCV RST S R V
Indicator
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CST
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and
off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded.
On for 300 ms (green) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being
initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 48/496
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) When the board is being powered or
being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The software runs normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in thesystem.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system
in the unprotected system.
The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
ACT On (green) The board is in the active state in the 1+1
protection system.
The board is already activated in the
unprotected system.
Off The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
The board is not activated in the
unprotected system.
Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the CST
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the CSH
Interface Description Connector Type
NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
RJ-45
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD1 External clock interface/The first time interface
(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)/The wayside E1
interface
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 49/496
Interface Description Connector Type
TOD2 The second time interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface
can transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data
service overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external
clock interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface andtransparent transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
Interface Pin Signal
NMS/COM
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial
interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receiving data (-)
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial
interface
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 50/496
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
Interface Pin Signal
EXT
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
6 Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector
Indicator State Meaning
LINK (green) On The link is normal.
Off The link fails.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or receiving data.
Off The interface is not transmitting or
receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 51/496
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the NE interface
C S T
S T A T
P R O G
S Y N C
S R V
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2C F R CV R ST
C S T
S T A T
P R O G
S Y N C
S R V
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2CF RCV RS T
LAN
A C T
A C T
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two system control boards, the NM interfaces and NE cascade
interfaces of the system control boards are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, you
need to use the NM interface and NE cascade interface of the working system control board, if possible.
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 interfaces
is provided in Table 3-7 and Table 3-8.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 interfaces are reserved for running the high-precision time
protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD1 interface
Pin Working Mode
External Clock
ExternalTime Input
(1 PPS +TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
ExternalTime Input
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
3 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 52/496
Pin Working Mode
External Clock
ExternalTime Input
(1 PPS +TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
ExternalTime Input
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
4 CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 CLK
transmit
ting (+)
Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 Notdefined
1 PPS signalinput (+)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signaloutput (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS timesignal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS timesignal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Not
defined
Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined
8 Not
defined
Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the TOD2 interface
Pin Working mode
External TimeInput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
3 1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS422 level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
input (-)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
output (-)
(RS422 level)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 53/496
Pin Working mode
External TimeInput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
4 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 1 PPS signal
input (+)
(RS422 level)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
input (+)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
output (+)
(RS422 level)
7 Time
informationinput (-)
(RS422 level)
Time information
output (-)
(RS422 level)
Not defined Not defined
8 Time
information
input (+)
(RS422 level)
Time information
output (+)
(RS422 level)
Not defined Not defined
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
The CF card stores the following information:
l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
l License file for microwave link capability
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 54/496
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-9 Setting the DIP switches
Setting the DIP Switchesa
Function
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 55/496
Setting the DIP Switchesa Function
1 2 3 4
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibition
state.
0 1 1 1 Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 0 Reserved (bydefault,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data
in the system
parameter area.
1 0 1 1 To erase the
databases.
1 1 0 0 To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
1 1 0 1 To erase the
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
1 1 1 0 To format the
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 56/496
Setting the DIP Switchesa Function
1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 To format the
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch isturned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
the NMS should be the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST)Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11
(FAN)
Figure 3-11 Logical slot for the logical board of the CST
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST)Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11
(FAN)
Table 3-10 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 7 > Slot 8
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 57/496
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.3.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection performance, clock
performance, wayside service interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and board
power consumption.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-11 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out
ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 58/496
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-12 Wayside service interface performance
Item PerformanceTransmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Impedance (ohm) 120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-13 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 22.36 mm (height) x 199.60 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width)
Weight 0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 20.7W
3.4 CSH
The CSH is an Hybrid system control, cross-connect, and timing board.
3.4.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
3.4.2 Functions and Features
The CSH provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, systemcontrol and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSH provides
auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.
3.4.3 Working Principle
The CSH comprises the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and buttons on the front panel.
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
3.4.6 Valid Slots
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 59/496
The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on
the NMS should be the same as the physical slot.
3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
3.4.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, clock performance, wayside service interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
3.4.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
3.4.2 Functions and Features
The CSH provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSH provides
auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.
Packet Switching
l Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services.
l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags and
forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the MAC address learning function.
l Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree
(CIST).
l Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol.
l Supports the QoS function.
l Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection.
l Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when a
fault occurs on the transmission network.
l Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) and
two load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm is
based on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address.
l Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah.
l Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.
8262.
Cross-Connection
l Grooms TDM service signals between boards.
l Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 60/496
System Control and Communication
l Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
l Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
l Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
l Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and provides up to 14 DCC channels.
l Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
l Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
l Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, PDH tributary
clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or microwave air interface link clock.
l Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, Synchronization Status Message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
l Supports the timing loop and switching between the clock of the main system and the clock
of the standby system. In addition, no bit errors should occur in the services in the case of
a normal clock switching.
l Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
l Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the board
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
l Provides one NM serial interface.
l Provides one NE cascade interface.
Protection Processing
l Supports the 1+1 hot backup for the system control unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, and clock unit. Thus, the system automatically switches over to the standby
system control and communication board when the main system control andcommunication board is faulty.
l Performs the 1+1 and N+1 protection switching.
l Performs the linear MSP switching.
l Performs the clock protection switching.
l Performs the SNCP switching.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l
Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 61/496
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the board reset.
l Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the
-48 V power supply.
l Checks the indicators on all the boards.
l Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading preventionfunction.
l Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and the backup of the configuration data.
The backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an
on-site board replacement.
3.4.3 Working Principle
The CSH comprises the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 62/496
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH
Backplane
System control
and
communication
unit
Cross-connect unit
Power
supplyunit
Clock unit
Clock signal required
by other boards
External clock signal
Clock interface
Control bus
TDM service
-48 V1
-48 V2
Supplies power to
the other units onthe board
Clock signal
provided to other
units on the board
+12 V power supplied to
the fans
+3.3 V power supplied to
other boards
NE cascade
interface
Packet
switching unit
GE bus
NM interfaceNM serial
interface
FE signalSystem control and
communication unit
Clock unit
Time interface 2
Time
interface 1
Service board
Service board
System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
l Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.
l The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through
the control bus.
l
The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,through the control bus.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 63/496
l Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
l The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
– Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
– Adds or drops the orderwire, synchronous data and asynchronous data services.
– Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
l The system control and communication unit on the board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired board by carrying the FE signal over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the 1+1 hot backup between the paired
boards is realized.
Packet Switching Unit
The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer
2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.
l After receiving Ethernet services from the other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit
grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are issued from the system
control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from the other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit
transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing.
The system control and communication unit processes the protocol packets and then sends
the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the other Ethernet boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order cross-
connect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-13 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 64/496
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
Sink TDMservice unit
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order cross-
connect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit
provides the system clock.
l The main and standby boards transmit the clock to each other.
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and buttons on the front panel.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 65/496
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH
C S H
S T A T
P R O G
S Y N C S R V
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2CF RCV RST
A C T
Indicator
Table 3-14 Description of the indicators on the CSH
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and
off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded.
On for 300 ms (green) andoff for 300 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being
initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered or
being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The software runs normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 66/496
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in thesystem.
Off There is no power supplied to the system
in the unprotected system.
The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
ACT On (green) The board is in the active state in the 1+1
protection system.
The board is already activated in the
unprotected system.
Off The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
The board is not activated in the
unprotected system.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces
Table 3-15 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces on the CSH
Interface Description Connector Type
NMS/COM NM interface/NM serial interface
RJ-45
EXT NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD1 External clock interface/The first time interface
(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)/The wayside E1
interface
TOD2 The second time interface
CF RCV CF configuration reset button -
RST Board warm reset button -
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 67/496
NOTE
l The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface
can transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data
service overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external
clock interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and
transparent transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ-45
connector.
Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table 3-16 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface
Interface Pin Signal
NMS/COM
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial
interface
5 Receive end of the NM serial interface
6 Receiving data (-)
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial
interface
Table 3-17 Pin assignment of the EXT interface
Interface Pin Signal
EXT1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 68/496
Interface Pin Signal
3 Receiving data (+)
6 Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-18.
Table 3-18 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector
Indicator State Meaning
LINK (green) On The link is normal.
Off The link fails.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off The interface is not transmitting or
receiving data.
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the NE interface
C S H
S
T A T
P
R O G
S
Y N C
S R V
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2C F R CV R ST
C S H
S T A T
P R O G
S Y N C
S R V
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2CF RCV RS T
LAN
A C T
A C T
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-32 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 69/496
NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two system control boards, the NM interfaces and NE cascade
interfaces of the system control boards are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, you
need to use the NM interface and NE cascade interface of the working system control board, if possible.
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) share the same RJ-45
interface (CLK/TOD) but occupy different pins of the RJ-45 interface. The pin assignment
information of the CLK/OD1 and TOD2 interfaces is provided in Table 3-19 and Table 3-20.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-19 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD1 interface
Pin Working Mode
External Clock
ExternalTime Input
(1 PPS +TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
ExternalTime Input
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
3 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422 level)
4 CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 CLK transmit
ting (+)
Groundingend
Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output (+)
(RS-422 level)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 70/496
Pin Working Mode
External Clock
ExternalTime Input
(1 PPS +TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
ExternalTime Input
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
7 Not
defined
Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined
8 Not
defined
Time
informationinput (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
informationoutput (+)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined
Table 3-20 Pin assignment of the TOD2 interface
Pin Working mode
External TimeInput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
3 1 PPS signal
input (-)
(RS422 level)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
input (-)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
output (-)
(RS422 level)
4 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
5 Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end
6 1 PPS signal
input (+)
(RS422 level)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
input (+)
(RS422 level)
DCLS time signal
output (+)
(RS422 level)
7 Time
information
input (-)
(RS422 level)
Time information
output (-)
(RS422 level)
Not defined Not defined
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 71/496
Pin Working mode
External TimeInput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeOutput
(1 PPS + TimeInformation)
External TimeInput
(DCLS)
External TimeOutput
(DCLS)
8 Time
information
input (+)
(RS422 level)
Time information
output (+)
(RS422 level)
Not defined Not defined
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF CardThis board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
The CF card stores the following information:
l All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
l NE software and all the board software programs
l All the FPGA files
l License file for microwave link capability
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1
1. DIP switches 2. CF card
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 72/496
Table 3-21 Setting the DIP switches
Setting the DIP Switchesa Function
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
0 0 0 1 Reserved.
0 0 1 0 Memory self-
check state.
0 0 1 1 Commissioning
state.
0 1 0 0 Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.
0 1 0 1 BIOS holdover
state.
0 1 1 0 BIOS exhibitionstate.
0 1 1 1 Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 0 Reserved (by
default,
operating statewhen the
watchdog is
started).
1 0 0 1 To recover the
data of the CF
card.
1 0 1 0 To erase the data
in the system
parameter area.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-36 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 73/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 74/496
Figure 3-19 Logical slot for the logical board of the CSH
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CSH)Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Table 3-22 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 7 > Slot 8
3.4.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
3.4.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, cross-
connection performance, clock performance, wayside service interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
Packet Switching
Supports the 10Gbit/s packet switching function.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 75/496
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-23 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out
ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-24 Wayside service interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Impedance (ohm) 120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-25 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 22.36 mm (height) x 199.60 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width)
Weight 0.74 kg
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-39
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 76/496
Power Consumption
Power Consumption : < 25.3 W
3.5 IF1The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution
modes.
3.5.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3.5.2 Functions and Features
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slots.
3.5.6 Board Parameter SettingsThis topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
3.5.7 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.5.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 77/496
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.l Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwave
signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode.
In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values
are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the
overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the pass-
through mode.
Pointer Processing
l Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals.
l Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.
Protection Processing
l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
l Supports N+1 protection.
l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in an SNCP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, N+1 protection, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio
Transmission System Feature Description.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function andsetting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.
l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-41
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 78/496
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l
Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
Cross-connect unitI F I
F
processing
unit
Logicprocessingunit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
MUX/DEMUXunit
MODEM
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
System control and
communication unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM switching signal
Service
bus
Overhead
bus
Control bus
-48 V
+3.3
V+3.3 power supplied
to the monitoring
circuit
-48 V power supplied
to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to
other modules on theboard
System clock signalClock signal provided
to the other units on
the board
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 79/496
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-26 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow1 Combiner interface
unit
Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave
service signal from the IF signal.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.
l Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface
of the CPU unit in the system control and
communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of the service signal through the
automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l
Filters the signal.l Performs A/D conversion.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates the
corresponding alarms.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-43
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 80/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
5 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4
signal to the logic processing unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 81/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Detects the PDH microwave frame header and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Verifies the check code and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes
from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/soverhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the TU pointers.
l Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into
the specified position in the VC-4.
6 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signaloccupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-45
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 82/496
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-27 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
2 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Sets the higher order path overheads.
l Sets the AU pointer.
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted
from the system control and communication unit.
6 Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service
signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also
reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply unit
l Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V power to the ODU.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 83/496
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1
PULL
I F 1
IFI O
ODU-PWR
S T A T
S R V
L I N K
O D U
R M T
A C T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I F 1
Indicators
Table 3-28 Description of the indicators on the IF1
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-47
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 84/496
Indicator State Meaning
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not
added on the NMS
l The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standbystate in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is not activated
in the unprotected system.
Interfaces
Table 3-29 Description of the Interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
IF IF interface TNC IF jumper b
ODU-PWR a ODU power switch - -
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 85/496
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slots.
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 8Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11(FAN)
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-49
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 86/496
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 8Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Table 3-30 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 3 and 5 > slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2
NOTE
When configured in a 1+1 IF protection group, two IF boards must be configured in a slot pair, namely,
slot 1 and slot 2, slot 3 and slot 5, or slot 4 and slot 6.
3.5.6 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.5.7 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 87/496
IF Performance
Table 3-31 IF performance
Item PerformanceIF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
10
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-32 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals
l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time-
domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-33 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width)
Weight 0.72 kg
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-51
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 88/496
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
NOTE
In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.
3.6.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
3.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1–6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
3.6.6 Parameter Settings
This topic pr ovides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
3.6.7 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3.6.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
3.6.2 Functions and Features
The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-52 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 89/496
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
l
Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
l Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
Protection Processing
l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
l Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and N+1 protection, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio
Transmission System Feature Description.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l
Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
l Supports the detection of the board clock.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-53
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 90/496
l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.
3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to theframe structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I F IF
processing
unit
Logic
processi
ngunit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
MUX/DEMUXunit
MODEM
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave frame
signal
HSM switching signal
Service bus
Overhead
bus
GE busPacket switching unit
Control bus
-48V2
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to
the other units on the board
System clock signalClock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Ethernet
processin
g unit
+3.3
V
-48 V1
+3.3 V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
System control and
communication unit
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 91/496
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-34 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface
unit
Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave
service signal from the IF signal.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.
l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Filters the signal.
l Performs the ADC sampling.
l Performs A/D conversion.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates the
corresponding alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Verifies the check code and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the ethernet processing
unit.
6 Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-55
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 92/496
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
7 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-35 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
5 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters the signal.
l Amplifies the signals.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 93/496
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
7 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted
from the system control and communication unit.
8 Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service
signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power tothe other units on the IFU2.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2
I F U 2
PULL
IF I O
ODU-PWR
S T A T
S R V
L I N K
O D U
R M T
A C T
WARNING-48V OUTPUTTURN OFF POWER
BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-57
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 94/496
Indicators
Table 3-36 Description of the indicators on the IFU2
Indicator State Meaning STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not
added on the NMS
l The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) andoff for 300 ms repeatedly
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 95/496
Indicator State Meaning
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standby
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is not activated
in the unprotected system.
Interface and Switch
Table 3-37 Description of the Interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
IF IF interface TNC IF jumper b
ODU-PWR a ODU power switch - -
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-59
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 96/496
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1–6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 8Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 8Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
Table 3-38 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 3 and 5 > slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2
NOTE
When configured in a 1+1 IF protection group, two IF boards must be configured in a slot pair, namely,
slot 1 and slot 2, slot 3 and slot 5, or slot 4 and slot 6.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 97/496
3.6.6 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.6.7 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-39 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm) 50
ODU O&M signal
Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
10
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-61
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 98/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 99/496
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1–6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
3.7.6 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
3.7.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
3.7.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
3.7.2 Functions and Features
The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the cross-
polarization interference in the IF signal.
IF Processing
l Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports
the manual configuration of the XPIC function.
l Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
l Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
l Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
l Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
l Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
l Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
l Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
l Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the link ID.
Protection Processing
l Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
l Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
l Supports N+1 protection.
NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, N+1 protection, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 950 RadioTransmission System Feature Description.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-63
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 100/496
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.
l Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
l Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
l Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the detection of the board voltage.
l Supports the detection of the board clock.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.
3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 101/496
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I IF
processing
unit
Logic
processi
ngunit System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
MUX/DEMUXunit
MODEM
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
Power
supply
unit
Clockunit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired
board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM switching
signal
Service busOverhead
bus
GE
bus Packet switching unit
Control
bus
- 48V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3V power supplied to the
other units on the board
System clock signalClock signal provided to theother units on the board
Ethernet
processing
unit
+3.3
V
- 48 V1
+3.3V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
XPIC signal
F
System control and
communication unitSMODEM
unit
- 48 V2
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-42 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface
unit
Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave
service signal from the IF signal.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates the ODU control signal.
l Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control
and communication unit.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-65
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 102/496
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
3 IF processing unit l Performs the ADC sampling.
l Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.– Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and
transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.
– Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.
l Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the
paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the
MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF
signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates the
corresponding alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Verifies the check code and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding
alarms.
l Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the
microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
l Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service
signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid
microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing
unit.
6 Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 103/496
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
7 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the main and standby cross-connect units.
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Ethernet processing
unit
l Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
l Processes the GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
l Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
5 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
l Filters the signal.
l Amplifies the signals.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-67
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 104/496
Step FunctionalModule
Processing Flow
7 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted
from the system control and communication unit.
8 Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service
signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are alsoreported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
l This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power tothe other units on the IFX2.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2
I F X 2
IF I O
ODU-PWR
S T A T
S R V
L I N K
O D U
R M T
A C T
WARNING-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE I F X 2
X-IN X-OUTPULL X P I C
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 105/496
Indicators
Table 3-44 Description of the indicators on the IFX2
Indicator State Meaning XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is
normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off The XPIC function is
disabled.
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarmoccurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not
added on the NMSl The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-69
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 106/496
Indicator State Meaning
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standby
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l
The board is not activatedin the unprotected system.
Interfaces
Table 3-45 Description of the interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
IF IF interface TNC IF jumper b
ODU-PWR a ODU power switch - -
X-IN XPIC signal input
interface
SMA XPIC cable
X-OUT XPIC signal output
interface
SMA
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 107/496
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.7.5 Valid Slot
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1–6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 8Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11
(FAN)
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 8Slot 10
(PIU) Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-71
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 108/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 109/496
Item Performance
Receive frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
10
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-48 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.
Adaptive time-
domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.80 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces andtwo GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
3.8.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
3.8.2 Functions and Features
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-73
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 110/496
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FEinterfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
3.8.6 Board Feature Code
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
3.8.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3.8.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
3.8.2 Functions and Features
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing
l The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical
modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
l Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. The
supported working modes are as follows:
– The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M
half duplex, and auto-negotiation.
– The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.
– The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
l Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLAN
tags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
l Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
l Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length
ranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes.
l Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.
l Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 111/496
l Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function.
l Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
l Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE
For details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
Feature Description.
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packet
switching board:
l Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services.
l Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN
services.
QoS Service Processing
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with the
packet switching board:
l Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, S-
VLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in the
IPv6 packets.
l Supports CAR flow monitoring.
l Supports queue scheduling.
– Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues.– Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP
+WRR, or WRR.
l Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.
Ethernet OAM Processing
The Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when working
with the packet switching board:
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:
– Management of OAM maintenance points
– Continuity check test
– Loopback test
– Link trace test
l Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:
– OAM automatic discovery
– Link performance monitoring
– Fault detection
– Loopback at the remote end
– Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-75
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 112/496
Clock Processing
l Supports synchronous Ethernet.
l Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the alarm thresholds.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
l Supports RMON performance events.
NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports.
l Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the detection of the board temperature.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.
3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-76 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 113/496
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram
GE signal
access unit
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Logiccontrol unit
Clock unit
Backplane
Control bus of the board
System control andcommunication unit
Packet switching unit
GE signal
FE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Control bus
+3.3 V+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
System clockClock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Control signal
Control signal
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2+3.3 V power supplied to
the board
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 GE signal access unit l Provides access to GE signal.
l Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for the GE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC
code processing, and Ethernet performance count for
the frame signals.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-77
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 114/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
2 Ethernet processing
unit
l Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the
Ethernet data frames.
l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic
classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the
Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic
processing unit.
3 Logic processing
unit
Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the main and
standby packet switching units.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Logic processing unit l Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
2 Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
l Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping
and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the
corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags
contained in the Ethernet data frames.
3 GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance count.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/
GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through
the control unit on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units through the system control bus. The configuration data and query
commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 115/496
board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and
communication unit through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the EM6T
E M 6 T
S T A T
S R V
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4GE2 E
M 6 T
GE1 P R O G
Figure 3-34 Front panel of the EM6F
E M 6 F
S T A T
S R V
GE2 E
M 6 F
GE1 L I N K 1
L I N K 2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 P R O G
Indicators
Table 3-52 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-79
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 116/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 117/496
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Interfaces
Table 3-53 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F
Interfac
e
Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
FE1 FE interface
RJ-45 5.8 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1 GE electrical
interfaceGE2
GE1 GE optical
interface (EM6F)
LC (SFP optical module) 5.5 Fiber Jumper
GE2
The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation
modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-35 and refer
to Table 3-54 and Table 3-55.
Figure 3-35 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Table 3-54 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-81
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 118/496
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Table 3-55 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 119/496
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-56.
Table 3-56 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector
Indicator State Meaning LINK (green) On The link is normal.
Off The link fails.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The interface is transmitting or
receiving data.
Off The interface is not transmitting or
receiving data.
Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-36 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (IEM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 8Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 8Slot 10
(PIU)Slot 11(FAN)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-83
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 120/496
Table 3-57 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5
3.8.6 Board Feature Code
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
Table 3-58 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type BOM Code of the Module
01 1000BASE-SX (Multi-mode, 0.5 km)
34060286
02 1000BASE-LX (Single-
mode, 10 km)
34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
(100m)
34100052
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
3.8.8 Technical SpecificationsThis topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Performance of Optical Interfaces
The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 121/496
Table 3-59 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 1000
Classification code 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9.5 to 0 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -19
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9 9
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces
The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-60 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ-45
Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces
The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-85
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 122/496
Table 3-61 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Interface type RJ-45
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-62 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Dimensions 19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.37 kg 0.38 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
3.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
3.9.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
3.9.6 Board Feature Code
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 123/496
The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board
name.
3.9.7 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
3.9.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
3.9.2 Functions and Features
The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications for Optical Interfaces
l Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.
l All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications for Optical Modules
l Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module.
l Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
l Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser.
l Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE
The ALS function is described as follows:
1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical module
automatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port.
2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60s
interval.
3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals.
l Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination
mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the
overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the
receive dir ection, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default,the board adopts the pass-through mode.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-87
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 124/496
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.
Protection Processing l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in an SNCP group.
l Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in a linear MSP group.
l Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
l Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE
For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.
l Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
l Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
service interruption.
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 125/496
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
Backplane
Logic
control
unit
STM-1
STM-1
O/E
conversion
unit
Overhead
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
System control and
communication unit
Overhead
bus
System control and
communication unit
Cross-connect unit
Clock
unit System clock signal
+3.3 V
Servicebus
Control bus
Supplies power to the
other units on the board
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-63 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Detects the R_LOS alarm.
l Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical
signals.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-89
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 126/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Restores the clock signal.
l Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.l Performs descrambling.
l Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and
generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports it to the system control and communication
unit.
l
Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytesincluding the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K
bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the
logic processing unit.
l Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the
corresponding performance events.
l Checks the higher order path overheads and generates
the corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4
signal to the logic processing unit.
3 Logic processingunit
l
Processes the clock signal.l Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8
Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 8 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the main and standby cross-connect unit.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-64 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2
Mbit/s overhead signals.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 127/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Sets the higher order path overheads.
l Sets the AU pointer.
l Sets the multiplex section overheads.
l Sets the regenerator section overheads.
l Performs scrambling.
3 O/E conversion unit l Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also
reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the SL1D
S L 1 D
TX1/RX1
CLASS1
LASERPRODUCT
S L 1 D
S T A T
S R V
L O S 1
L O S 2
TX2/RX2
Indicators
Table 3-65 Description of the indicators on the SL1D
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-91
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 128/496
Indicator State Meaning
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of
the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of
the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface
of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.Off The second optical interface
of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Interfaces
Table 3-66 Description of the interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the
first STM-1 optical
interface
LC (SFP) Fiber jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
first STM-1 optical
interface
TX2 Transmit port of the
second STM-1
optical interface
LC (SFP)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 129/496
Interface Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
RX2 Receive port of the
second STM-1
optical interface
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-40 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 8
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Figure 3-41 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 8
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Table 3-67 Slot allocation for the SL1D
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-93
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 130/496
3.9.6 Board Feature Code
The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board
name.
Table 3-68 Board feature code of the SL1D
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of theOptical Module
01 Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km) 34060287
02 S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km) 34060276
03 L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km) 34060281
04 L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km) 34060282
3.9.7 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH InterfacesA.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
3.9.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. Thefollowing table provides the primary performance.
Table 3-69 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 155520
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 131/496
Item Performance
Transmission distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating wavelength(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
10 8.2 10 10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-70 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width)
Weight 0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.10.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
3.10.2 Functions and Features
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-95
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 132/496
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
3.10.6 Board Feature Code
The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
3.10.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, boardmechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3.10.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
3.10.2 Functions and Features
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing
l Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.
l Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes.
l Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Clock Processing
l Supports the E1 retiming function.
l Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.
Alarms and Performance Events
l Reports various alarms and performance events.
l Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
l Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 133/496
Maintenance Features
l Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces.
l Supports the PRBS 15 test.
l Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.l Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
NOTE
l For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
l A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
a service interruption.
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-42 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Logic
control
unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
E1
Inte
rfaceunit
Mapping/Demappi
ngunit
System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
E1 signal Co
decunit
Logic
processingunit
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the boardSystem clock signal
Power
Supply Unit
-48 V1+3.3V power supplied
to the board
-48 V2
+3.3V backup power
supplied to the board
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-97
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 134/496
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction
Table 3-71 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow1 Interface unit The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer
and then are transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.
l Recovers the clock signal.
l Detects the T_ALOS alarm.
l Performs the HDB3 decoding.
3 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.
l
Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thusforming VC-12s.
l Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus
forming one TUG-2.
l Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus
forming one TUG-3.
l Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus
forming one C-4.
l Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,
thus forming one VC-4.
4 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication
signal to the main and standby cross-connect units.
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-72 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes the clock signal.
l Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal
from the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 135/496
Step Functional Unit Processing Flow
2 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the
corresponding alarms and performance events.
l Extracts the E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs the HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then
are transmitted to the external cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow
The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication
unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the
SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events
are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit
This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.10.4 Front PanelThere are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-43 Front panel of the SP3S
S P 3 S
S T A T
S R V
1-16 S
P 3 S
E1
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-99
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 136/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 137/496
Table 3-75 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D
Interface Description ConnectorType
Corresponding Cable
1-22 The first to sixteenthE1 interfaces
Anea 96 E1 Cable to the ExternalEquipment orE1 Cable to the
E1 Panel
23-42 The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
interfaces
Anea 96 E1 Cable to the External
Equipment orE1 Cable to the
E1 Panel
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 950, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16
correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment information
of the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-45 and Table 3-76.
Figure 3-45 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.96
POS.1
Table 3-76 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25 The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
2 The first received E1
differential signal (-)
26 The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
3 The second received E1
differential signal (+)
27 The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
4 The second received E1
differential signal (-)
28 The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
5 The third received E1
differential signal (+)
29 The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-101
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 138/496
Pin Signal Pin Signal
6 The third received E1
differential signal (-)
30 The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
7 The fourth received E1differential signal (+)
31 The fourth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (+)
8 The fourth received E1
differential signal (-)
32 The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
9 The fifth received E1
differential signal (+)
33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
10 The fifth received E1
differential signal (-)
34 The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
11 The sixth received E1
differential signal (+)
35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
12 The sixth received E1
differential signal (-)
36 The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
13 The seventh received E1
differential signal (+)
37 The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
14 The seventh received E1
differential signal (-)
38 The seventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
15 The eighth received E1
differential signal (+)
39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
16 The eighth received E1
differential signal (-)
40 The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
17 The ninth received E1
differential signal (+)
41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
18 The ninth received E1
differential signal (-)
42 The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (-)
19 The tenth received E1
differential signal (+)
43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
20 The tenth received E1differential signal (-)
44 The tenth transmitted E1 differentialsignal (-)
21 The eleventh received E1
differential signal (+)
45 The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
22 The eleventh received E1
differential signal (-)
46 The eleventh transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
23 The twelfth received E1
differential signal (+)
47 The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
24 The twelfth received E1
differential signal (-)
48 The twelfth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-102 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 139/496
Pin Signal Pin Signal
49 The thirteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
73 The thirteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
50 The thirteenth received E1differential signal (-)
74 The thirteenth transmitted E1differential signal (-)
51 The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
75 The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
52 The fourteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
76 The fourteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
53 The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
77 The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
54 The fifteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
78 The fifteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
55 The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (+)
79 The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (+)
56 The sixteenth received E1
differential signal (-)
80 The sixteenth transmitted E1
differential signal (-)
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMSshould be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 950 chassis
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 8Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11(FAN)
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SP3S/SP3D
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 8Slot 10(PIU)
Slot 11(FAN)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-103
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 140/496
Table 3-77 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5
3.10.6 Board Feature Code
The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Table 3-78 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code Interface Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related ReferencesA.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
3.10.8 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-79 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Code pattern HDB3
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-104 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 141/496
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-80 Mechanical behavior
Item PerformanceSP3S SP3D
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight 0.54 kg 0.64 kg
Power consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.11 AUX
The AUX is the auxiliary and management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can
house only one AUX.
3.11.1 Version Description
The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
3.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe AUX provides multiple auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces, including the one
orderwire interface, one synchronous data interface, one asynchronous data interface, and one
four-input/two-output external alarm interface.
3.11.3 Working Principle
The main components of the AUX are the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, and auxiliary interfaces on the front panel.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in Slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
3.11.6 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
3.11.1 Version Description
The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-105
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 142/496
3.11.2 Functions and Features
The AUX provides multiple auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces, including the one
orderwire interface, one synchronous data interface, one asynchronous data interface, and one
four-input/two-output external alarm interface.
l Provides one orderwire interface.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data interface.
l Supports one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data interface.
l Supports the input of four channels of external alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of external alarms.
l Supports hot swapping.
l Supports the detection of the board power supply.
3.11.3 Working Principle
The main components of the AUX are the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the AUX
19.2 kbit/s as ynchronous
data interface
Orderwireunit
Power supply unit
Clock unit
Logic control
unit
Board statusdetection unit
Backplane
four-input/two-outputalarm interface
One orderwire interface
64 kbit/s synchronousdata interface
Power dipdetection signal
System bus
+3.3 V
System control andcommunication unit
System control and
communication unitClock
signal
Power Supply Unit
l Access the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane to other units on the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down the control signal.
Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one Orderwire interface.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data interface.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 143/496
l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data interface.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface can,
however, implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
Logic Control Unit
l Provides the CPU unit interface and works with the CPU unit to realize the board control
function.
l Processes the orderwire byte and overhead bytes.
l Processes the clock signal.
l Provides the board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby CST/CSH boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of the clock reference source automatically and by running the
corresponding command.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit
l Detects the board performance data, such as the board voltage.
l Stores the board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides the clock signal to the logic control unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management interfaces, and auxiliary interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-49 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the AUX
A U X
S T A T
S R V
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-107
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 144/496
Indicators
Table 3-81 Description of the indicators on the AUX
Indicator State Meaning STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the board.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces
Table 3-82 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
Interface Description Connector Type
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface RJ-45
ALMI Alarm input
ALMO Alarm output
PHONE Orderwire phone
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-50 shows the front view of the RJ-45
connector.
Figure 3-50 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 145/496
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-83.
Table 3-83 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface
Interface Pin Signal
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
For the pin assignment information of the ALMI and ALMO interfaces, see Table 3-84 and see
Table 3-85.
Table 3-84 Pin assignment of the ALMI interface
Interface Pin Signal
ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the second external alarm input
signal
6 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
7 The forth external alarm input signal
8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal
Table 3-85 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface
Interface Pin Signal
ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-109
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 146/496
Interface Pin Signal
2 The first external alarm output signal (-)
3 The second external alarm output signal (+)
4 The first external alarm output signal (+)
5 The first external alarm output signal (-)
6 The second external alarm output signal (-)
7 The second external alarm output signal (+)
8 The second external alarm output signal (-)
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in Slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-51 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 8
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Figure 3-52 Logical slots for the logical boards of the AUX
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 8
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Table 3-86 Slot configuration for the AUX
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 147/496
3.11.6 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-87 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-88 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 64
Interface type Codirectional
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-89 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-111
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 148/496
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) ≤ 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-90 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm
(width)
Weight 0.27 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 1.3 W
3.12 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power sup ply.
3.12.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
3.12.2 Functions and Features
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
3.12.3 Working Principle
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, slot ID unit, and board in-position unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access interfaces, and a label.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS should be
the same as the physical slots.
3.12.6 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
3.12.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 149/496
3.12.2 Functions and Features
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
l Power access
Each of the two PIU accesses one -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supply for the equipment.
l Power protection
The PIU protects the DC power supply against overcurrent and short circuits. In this
manner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the case
of overcurrent.
l Lightning protection
The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection
fails.
l Power backup
The two PIUs provide 1+1 hot backup for each other. One PIU is capable of supplying
power for the entire chassis.
3.12.3 Working Principle
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, slot ID unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-53 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-53 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Communication
unit
Board
in-position unit
Backplane
Inter-board
communication
bus System control and
communication unit
Lightning protection
and failure
detection unit
-48 V/-60 V
Board
in-position
signal
Alarm signal indicating
lightning protection failure
Other boards
System control and
communication unit
Slot ID unit
Slot ID
informationSystem control and
communication unit
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-113
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 150/496
Lightning Protection and Failure Detection Unit
This unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning
protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system
control and communication unit, through the communication unit.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm
signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.
Slot ID Unit
This unit reports the slot ID information to the system control and communication unit.
Board In-Position Unit
This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access interfaces, and a label.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-54 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-54 Front panel of the PIU
- 4 8 V
- 6 0 V
P W R
N E G ( - ) R T N ( + )
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 151/496
Indicators
Table 3-91 Description of the power status indicators
Indicator Status DescriptionPWR On (green) The power supply is connected.
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.
Interfaces
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-92 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU and
their respective usage.
Table 3-92 Description of the interfaces on the PIU
Interface Interface Type Usage
NEG(-) -48 V power input
interface
Inputs the -48 V power.
RTN(+) BGND power input
interface
Inputs the BGND power.
Label
The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
ensure that these power supplies are disabled.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS should be
the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-55 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-115
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 152/496
Figure 3-56 Logical slots for the logical boards of the PIU
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 10(PIU)
3.12.6 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
Table 3-93 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-93 Technical specifications
Item Performance
Dimensions 41.4 mm (width) x 229.9 mm (depth) x 21.0
mm (height)
Weight 0.12 kg
Power Consumption < 0.5 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.13 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
3.13.1 Version Description
The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
3.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
3.13.3 Working Principle
The FAN mainly consists of the combiner/start-delay unit, filter unit, communication unit,
intelligent fan speed adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slot.
3.13.6 Technical Specifications
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 153/496
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
3.13.1 Version Description
The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
3.13.2 Functions and Features
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN has the following functions and features:
l Accesses two +12 V power supplies for driving the six fans each of which consumes 6 W
power.
l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans, protects fans against overcurrent, and
filters the lower frequency.
l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system
with lowest power consumption and lowest noise.
l Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information.
l Provides alarm indicators.
l Disables the power supplies to the fans.
3.13.3 Working Principle
The FAN mainly consists of the combiner/start-delay unit, filter unit, communication unit,
intelligent fan speed adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-57 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-57 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Six fans
+12 power shutdownsignal
+12 V
Inter-board communicationbus
Board in-position
unit
PWM signal
Communicatio
n unit
System control and
communication unit
Fan rotating speed signal
Fan in-position signal
+12 V
+12 V
+12 V
Filter unit
Combiner/start-
delay unit
CombineStart delay
+12 V
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit
PWM drivingunit
Rotating speed
reporting unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
System control andcommunication unit
System control and
communication unit
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-117
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 154/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 155/496
Figure 3-58 Front Panel Diagram
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators
Table 3-95 Description of the fan status indicators
Indicator State Meaning
FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack
The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-119
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 156/496
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMSshould be the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-59 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Figure 3-60 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 1
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 4
Slot 6
Slot 8
Slot 9(PIU)
Slot 10
(PIU)
3.13.6 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
Table 3-96 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-96 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item Performance
Dimensions 86.2 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)
Weight 0.302 kg
Power consumption <4.1 W (room temprature)
<29.6 W (high temperature)
Working voltage 10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)
3 Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
3-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 157/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 158/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 159/496
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pin Signal Pin Signal
20 1st E1 receiving differentialsignal (+) 21 1st E1 transmitting differentialsignal (+)
2 1st E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
3 1st E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
22 2nd E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
23 2nd E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
4 2nd E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
5 2nd E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
24 3rd E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
25 3rd E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
6 3rd E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
7 3nd E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
26 4th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
27 4th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
8 4th E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
9 4th E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
36 5th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
35 5th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
17 5th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)
16 5th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)
34 6th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
33 6th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
15 6th E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
14 6th E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
32 7th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
31 7th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
13 7th E1 receiving differential
signal (-)
12 7th E1 transmitting differential
signal (-)
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 160/496
Pin Signal Pin Signal
30 8th E1 receiving differential
signal (+)
29 8th E1 transmitting differential
signal (+)
11 8th E1 receiving differentialsignal (-)
10 8th E1 transmitting differentialsignal (-)
Others Reserved - -
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
NEG2(-)
INPUT
RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 4
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT OUTPUT A B
2
20A20A 20A 20A20A20A 20A 20A
5 6
1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals
4 Accessories
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 161/496
3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)
5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)
Interfaces
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU
Position Interface Description
Output power
terminals (A)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Grounding stud
of the two-holeOT terminal
For connecting the PGND cable
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+) The first power input (+)
RTN2(+) The second power input (+)
NEG1(-) The first power input (-)
NEG2(-) The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,
respectively.
Power
switches (B)
20 A They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse
capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,
respectively.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
l Each input power supply supports four outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.
l The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 162/496
Working Principle
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW1
SW2
SW4
SW4
INPUT
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
NEG1(-)
NEG2(-)
+ 1-
+ 2-
+ 3-
+ 4
-
+ 1-
+ 2-
+ 3-
+ 4-
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
PGND
BGND
BGND
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is
inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution ModeWhen the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits
terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.
4 Accessories
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 163/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 164/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 165/496
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables
of the IDU 950.
5.1 Power Ca ble
The power ca ble connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
5.4 XPIC Ca ble
The XPIC ca ble is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 950. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the interface
of the orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 166/496
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 167/496
5.1 Power Cable
The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable
Model Cable Terminal
6 mm2 power
cable and
terminal
Power Cable, 450 V/
750 V, H07Z-K-6
mm2, Blue/Black,
Low Smoke Zero
Halogen Cable
Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,
Conductor Cross Section 6 mm2, 30 A, Insertion
Depth 12 mm, Blue
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 950, the power cable whose conductor line has a sectional area of 6 mm 2 can
extend for a maximum distance of 43 m.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and theexternal equipment share the same ground.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 168/496
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
2
Main label
H.S.tubeCable tie1
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 169/496
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
1
Main label
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N
connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a
TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
l The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
l When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-
inch IF cable to the IF board.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 170/496
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
2H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignment
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable
The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of theXPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC
working group.
When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN
port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l
XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the
IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very
short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction, for example, the
IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. The XPIC cable using straight connectors is also used to
connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same IFX2 board to loop back signals.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 171/496
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
L1
1 1
L2
22
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male
Cable Connection Table
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 950. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 172/496
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE optical
interfaces.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 173/496
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 174/496
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.3 E1 Transit CableAn E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1
cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cablesand 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1 A
View A
Pos .1
Pos.96Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,
Female Connector
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l The appearance of the 120–ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75–ohm E1 cable.
l The core of a 75–ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098–inch) crimp pliers to terminate
the ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 75–1–1 coaxial connectors.
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 175/496
Pin Assignment
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W1 Remarks Pin W2 RemarksCore Serial
No.Core Serial
No.
1 Tip 1 R1 25 Tip 2 T1
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R2 27 Tip 4 T2
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R3 29 Tip 6 T3
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R4 31 Tip 8 T4
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R5 33 Tip 10 T5
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R6 35 Tip 12 T6
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R7 37 Tip 14 T7
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R8 39 Tip 16 T8
16 Ring 40 Ring
17 Ring 17 R9 41 Ring 18 T9
18 Tip 42 Tip
19 Ring 19 R10 43 Ring 20 T10
20 Tip 44 Tip
21 Ring 21 R11 45 Ring 22 T11
22 Tip 46 Tip
23 Ring 23 R12 47 Ring 24 T12
24 Tip 48 Tip
49 Ring 25 R13 73 Ring 26 T13
50 Tip 74 Tip
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 176/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 177/496
Pin W1 Remarks
Pin W2 Remarks
Color oftheCore
Relation
Color oftheCore
Relation
17 White Twisted
pair
R9 41 White Twisted
pair
T9
18 Blue 42 Orange
19 White Twisted
pair
R10 43 White Twisted
pair
T10
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twisted
pair
R11 45 Red Twisted
pair
T11
22 Grey 46 Blue
23 Red Twisted pair R12 47 Red Twisted pair T1224 Orange 48 Green
49 Red Twisted
pair
R13 73 Red Twisted
pair
T13
50 Brown 74 Grey
51 Black Twisted
pair
R14 75 Black Twisted
pair
T14
52 Blue 76 Orange
53 Black Twisted
pair
R15 77 Black Twisted
pair
T15
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twisted
pair
R16 79 Yellow Twisted
pair
T16
56 Grey 80 Blue
Shell Braid Shell Braid
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 178/496
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel
1500 mm
A
APos.1
Pos.44
X1B
Pos.1
Pos.37
B
X2
X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male
Cable Connection Table
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel
ConnectorX1
ConnectorX2
Remarks ConnectorX1
ConnectorX2
Remarks
X1.38 X2.20 R1 X1.34 X2.36 R5
X1.23 X2.2 X1.19 X2.17
X1.37 X2.22 R2 X1.33 X2.34 R6
X1.22 X2.4 X1.18 X2.15
X1.36 X2.24 R3 X1.32 X2.32 R7
X1.21 X2.6 X1.17 X2.13
X1.35 X2.26 R4 X1.31 X2.30 R8
X1.20 X2.8 X1.16 X2.11
X1.15 X2.21 T1 X1.11 X2.35 T5
X1.30 X2.3 X1.26 X2.16
X1.14 X2.23 T2 X1.10 X2.33 T6
X1.29 X2.5 X1.25 X2.14
X1.13 X2.25 T3 X1.9 X2.31 T7
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 179/496
ConnectorX1
ConnectorX2
Remarks ConnectorX1
ConnectorX2
Remarks
X1.28 X2.7 X1.24 X2.12
X1.12 X2.27 T4 X1.8 X2.29 T8
X1.27 X2.9 X1.7 X2.10
Shell Braid Shell Braid
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable
An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected tothe E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors
Label 2M092
X3
X2
2
#4-40View B
Pos.44
Pos.1
Main Label
W2
W1
Label 1
X1 A
B
400
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 180/496
Cable Connection Table
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44
connectors
Wire Connector X1
Connector X2/X3
Remarks Connector X1
Connector X2/X3
Remarks
W1 X1.2 X2.38 R1 X1.10 X2.34 R5
X1.1 X2.23 X1.9 X2.19
X1.26 X2.15 T1 X1.34 X2.11 T5
X1.25 X2.30 X1.33 X2.26
X1.4 X2.37 R2 X1.12 X2.33 R6
X1.3 X2.22 X1.11 X2.18
X1.28 X2.14 T2 X1.36 X2.10 T6
X1.27 X2.29 X1.35 X2.25
X1.6 X2.36 R3 X1.14 X2.32 R7
X1.5 X2.21 X1.13 X2.17
X1.30 X2.13 T3 X1.38 X2.9 T7
X1.29 X2.28 X1.37 X2.24
X1.8 X2.35 R4 X1.16 X2.31 R8
X1.7 X2.20 X1.15 X2.16
X1.32 X2.12 T4 X1.40 X2.8 T8
X1.31 X2.27 X1.39 X2.7
W2 X1.18 X3.38 R9 X1.50 X3.34 R13
X1.17 X3.23 X1.49 X3.19
X1.42 X3.15 T9 X1.74 X3.11 T13
X1.41 X3.30 X1.73 X3.26
X1.20 X3.37 R10 X1.52 X3.33 R14
X1.19 X3.22 X1.51 X3.18
X1.44 X3.14 T10 X1.76 X3.10 T14
X1.43 X3.29 X1.75 X3.25
X1.22 X3.36 R11 X1.54 X3.32 R15
X1.21 X3.21 X1.53 X3.17
X1.46 X3.13 T11 X1.78 X3.9 T15
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 181/496
Wire Connector X1
Connector X2/X3
Remarks Connector X1
Connector X2/X3
Remarks
X1.45 X3.28 X1.77 X3.24
X1.24 X3.35 R12 X1.56 X3.31 R16
X1.23 X3.20 X1.55 X3.16
X1.48 X3.12 T12 X1.80 X3.8 T16
X1.47 X3.27 X1.79 X3.7
Shell Braid Shell Braid
5.7 Orderwire CableThe orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the interface
of the orderwire phone.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1
6
1
6
1 Main label
X1 X2
1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 182/496
5.8 Network Cable
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cableare terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface
(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the
network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDI-
X interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDI-
X interface, see Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 183/496
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)
6 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are
used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the
straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiX
RTN 950 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet serviceelectrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1
8
1
8
1Label 1 Label 2Main Label
1. Network port connector, RJ-45
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 184/496
Pin Assignment
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color RelationX1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5 Cables
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
5-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 185/496
A Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.7 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.12 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 186/496
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 187/496
A.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 188/496
Parameters for the Search Field
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
used on the DCN, youcan search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address of
GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicatewith the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTEIf Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE arelocated in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 189/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Search Address - - l If Address Type is set
to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP address
of the gateway NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies
the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password of the
gateway NE.
Parameter for Searching for NEs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Search for NE Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies
whether to search for all
the NEs in the specified
domain.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 190/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Create NE after search Selected
Deselected
Deselected l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE after
search. The NEs are
automatically created
after they are found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are used
for creating an NE.
NOTEIf only Create NE after
search is selected, Searchfor NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Upload after create Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically uploadthe NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 191/496
Parameter for the Found NEs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the found NE,which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates
the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes
No
Yes l This parameter
specifies the password
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NEafter search is
selected.
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE Status Created
Uncreated
- This parameter indicateswhether the found NE is
created.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-7
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 192/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 193/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Gateway Type Non-Gateway
Gateway
Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to
Gateway if the new NE
is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
l This parameter is set
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicatesthe gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol
IP
OSI
IP l This parameter needs to
be set when Gateway
Type is set to
Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
IP Address - - This parameter indicates
the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and theserver is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies
the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-9
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 194/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates
the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.
Parameters for Changing NE IDs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
New ID - - l The new ID refers to
the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
NOTEThe NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 195/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 196/496
Parameters for the Standard NTP Server
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Standard NTP Server
Identifier
NE ID
IP
NE ID l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP.
l If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the HWECC protocol,
this parameter is set to
NE ID.
l If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE and
communicates with thegateway NE through
the IP protocol, this
parameter is set to IP.
Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
l If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE, this
parameter is set to theID or IP address of the
gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server
Key
0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does
not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server needs
to be authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according to
the allocated key of the
NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 197/496
Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Synchronization
Starting Time
- - l This parameter
specifies the start timeof the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
l This parameter is set
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300 1 l This parameter
indicates the period of synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE
Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time
Localization Management.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-13
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 198/496
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is
enabled.
Parameters for Time Zone
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the
current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving
time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
l This parameter is set according to the
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120
Unit: minute(s)
- This parameter specifies the offset value of
the daylight saving time.
Start Rule DATE
WEEK
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight
saving time.
End Rule DATE
WEEK
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight
saving time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 199/496
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the NE.
Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter
indicates the key for NTP authentication.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
Password - - l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
l This parameter is set
according to the
requirements of the
external NTP server.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-15
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 200/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Trusted Yes
No
Yes l When this parameter is
set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After receiving
the key, the NE rejects
the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the key,
the NE provides the
clock synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
recommended that you
set a trusted key only.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functionsof NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 950 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 201/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the
operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled
Enabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether to
automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of
automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
A.2 Parameters for Cable ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
2. Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of
the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click
.
3. Click Search.
Parameters for Searching For Fibers
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source NE - - This parameter indicates
the name of the source NE
on which fibers or radio
links are found.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-17
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 202/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 203/496
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Fibers
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Create Ways Common Ways
Batch Ways
Common Ways l If Common Ways is
selected, fibers need to
created one by one.
l If Batch Ways is
selected, fibers can be
created in batches.
Fiber/Cable Type Fiber Fiber This parameter indicates
that Fiber/Cable Type to
be created is a fiber.
Name - - This parameter specifiesthe name of the fiber to be
created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies
the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - This parameter specifiesthe source NE on which
the fiber needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
- - This parameter specifies
the board, slot, and port of
the source NE on which
the fiber needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates
the level that corresponds
to the port on the board.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-19
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 204/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Medium Type G.652
G.653
G.654
G.655
G.652 This parameter specifies
the medium type of the
fiber.
Sink NE - - This parameter specifies
the sink NE on which the
fiber needs to be created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
- - This parameter specifies
the board, slot, and port of
the sink NE on which the
fiber needs to be created.
Direction Two-Fiber BidirectionalSingle-Fiber
Unidirectional
- This parameter specifiesthe direction of the fiber to
be created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies
the length of the fiber to be
created.
Attenuation(dB) - - This parameter specifies
the attenuation of the fiber
to be created.
Created On - - This parameter specifies
the time when the fiber is
created.
Creator - - This parameter specifies
the name of the person
who creates the fiber.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies
the name of the person
who maintains the fiber.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
Navigation Path
1. Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2. Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 205/496
Parameters for Microwave Links
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Fiber/Cable Type Radio Link Radio Link This parameter indicates
that a radio link needs to be created is Fiber/Cable
Type.
Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the radio link
to be created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
Remarks - - This parameter specifiesthe remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE - - The parameter specifies
the source NE on which
the radio link needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
- - This parameter specifies
the board, slot, and port of
the source NE on which
the radio link needs to be
created.
Rate Level - - This parameter indicates
the level that corresponds
to the port on the IF board.
Sink NE - - The parameter specifies
the sink NE on which the
radio link needs to be
created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port
- - This parameter specifies
the board, slot, and port of
the sink NE on which the
radio link needs to be
created.
Length(km) - - This parameter specifies
the length of the radio link
to be created.
Created On - - This parameter indicates
the time when the radio
link is created.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-21
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 206/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Creator - - This parameter specifies
the name of the person
who creates the radio link.
Maintainer - - This parameter specifies
the name of the person
who maintains the radio
link.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link ManagementThis topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 207/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 208/496
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC RateConfiguration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is
connected to the DCC channel.
NOTEOn the NMS interface, the first interface on the
system control, switching, and clock board (like
7-CSH-1) corresponds to its external clock
interface.
Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled (for line
ports)
Disabled (for
external clock
interfaces)
It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If external clock interfaces are used to
transparently transmit the DCC solution,
Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
the external clock interfaces.
Channel Type D1-D3D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDHradio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)
It is recommended that you use the defaultvalue, except for the following cases:
l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
solution is adopted, Channel Type for
the SDH line ports is set to a value that is
the same as the value for third-party
network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of Channel
Type for the SDH line ports should not
conflict with the value that is set for the
third-party network.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 209/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC
resources.
CommunicationStatus
- - This parameter indicates thecommunication status.
Protocol Type HWECC
TCP/IP
OSI
HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role User
Network
User l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD
Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC TransparentTransmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source Timeslot/
Porta
- - This parameter indicates the source timeslot
or port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-25
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 210/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate thecustomized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is
used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
Sink Timeslot/
Porta
- - This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or
port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 211/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that isused. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
l Generally, Transparent Transmission
of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Source Timeslot/Port.
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet PortExtended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-27
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 212/496
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ECC Extended
Mode
Automatically
Assign
Specified mode
Automatically
Assign
It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Parameters for Setting the Server
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
IP - 0.0.0.0 This parameter indicates the IP address of
the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 1601 l This parameter is valid only when ECCExtended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the U2000 functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the extended
ECC. Except for the NE that functions as
the server, all other NEs that use theextended ECC can function as the client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set
to the IP address of the server NE and the
specified pot number.
Port 1601 to 1699 1601
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-28 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 213/496
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the
ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer
NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance 0 to 64 0 l This parameter specifies the number of
NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route passes,namely, the number of ECC packet
forwarding attempts. The value can be set
to a value that is greater than the number
of actual ECC packet forwarding
attempts. If the value is set to a value that
is less than the number of actual ECC
packet forwarding attempts, however, the
destination NE fails to be accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level 4
5
- l This parameter indicates that multiple
ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode Manual
Automatic
- This parameter indicates the ECC routing
mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port
through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-29
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 214/496
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Destination
Address
- - This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Gateway IP - - This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of thenext hop of the packets.
Protocol DIRECT
STATIC
OSPF
RIP
OSPF_ASE
OSPF_NSSA
- l DIRECT: indicates the route between
the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered
by the routing information protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whoseDestination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so stubby
area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the
other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 215/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is
used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Hop Count 0 to 65535 - This parameter indicates the maximum
number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used
to indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Working Status Working
Unworking
- This parameter indicates whether the
current IP route is available.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IPRoute Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Destination
Address
- - This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-31
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 216/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 217/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535 6 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of twice
the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the interval for transmitting a request
through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to
transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the timeelapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of DCC Delay
(s).
LAN Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255 - l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodicallytransmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-33
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 218/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535 - l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the hello
packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in LAN
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set tothe same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the time for transmitting a request for
retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.
LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to
transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
l
The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of LAN Delay
(s).
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARPThis topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-34 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 219/496
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Proxy ARP Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
same network segment but differentdomains to communicate with each other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns a ARP spoofing packet, whichenables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address
of the destination NE. In this manner, the
packet that is to be sent to the destination
NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy
ARP function enabled and then
forwarded to the destination NE.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network LayerParameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-35
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 220/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 221/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the
adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that iscontained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System
ID
- - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Destination Area
ID
- - This parameter indicates the area ID of the
destination NE.
Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - ++This parameter indicates the number of
hops that reach the destination NE or
destination area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-37
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 222/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
LAPD Actor User
Network
User l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiationonly when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable
- - This parameter indicates whether the
current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD
is enabled.
LAPD Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time
to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-38 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 223/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry
Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximumnumber of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use thedefault value.
L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer
(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If thenetwork is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-39
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 224/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer
(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ESconfiguration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 Hello
Timer(s) to a smaller value.
l
This parameter needs to be set accordingto the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer
(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set accordingto the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 225/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer
(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the holdtimer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.
l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_BandwidthManagement
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCNManagement from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-41
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 226/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 227/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the FE
or GE port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit thenetwork management information over
the link only after the inband DCN
function is enabled at the FE or GE ports
at both ends of a link.
Parameters for Setting IF Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the IF port.
Enable Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the IF
port is enabled.
l The inband DCN can transmit the
network management information over
the link only after the IF ports at both ends
of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - Displays the port name.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-43
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 228/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protocol Type IP
HWECC
IP l If the values of ProtocolType are
different from each other, the equipment
at both ends cannot be interconnected
with each other. Therefore, Protocol
Type must be set to the same value for
the equipment at both ends of a link.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. Generally, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to IP.
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
The First Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable Serial Port
Access
Selected
Deselected
Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the
serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM Selected
Deselected
Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface
can be used to access the NMS.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-44 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 229/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Baud Rate 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
9600 l This parameter specifies the data
transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
l This parameter is set according to the rate
of the serial port at the opposite end, and
the rates at both ends must be the same.
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access ControlThis topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for LCT Access Control
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-45
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 230/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Disable Access
Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
case, when the LCT requests an LCT user
to log in to the NE, the NE does not check
the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-46 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 231/496
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
56M
- l This parameter specifies the working
bandwidth of the radio link.
l When this parameter is set to 56M, the
high-power ODU must be used.
Polarization
direction-V
- - l This parameter indicates the polarization
direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you install the two
IFX2 boards that form an XPIC
workgroup in the slots that are at the same
layer or in the same column, and set the
IF port on the IFX2 board that has asmaller slot number to Link ID-V and the
IF port on the other IFX2 board to Link
ID-H.
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and Link
ID-H must also be set to the same value
at both ends of a link.
Link ID-H 2
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-47
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 232/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU must be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should notexceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the channel
central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-48 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 233/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
lower than the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the
ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receivemicrowave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU normally transmits and receives
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-49
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 234/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l The central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
automatic threshold function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-50 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 235/496
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction-V
- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
direction-H
- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
56M
- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the
channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-51
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 236/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 237/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-53
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 238/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, thetransmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction
- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-54 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 239/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
AM Enable Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTEModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link thatcorresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTEModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-55
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 240/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and cannot be set.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and cannot
be set.
E1 Capacity 1 to 75 - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in Hybrid
work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1
Capacity.
The E1 Capacity must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
Parameters for ATPC Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-56 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 241/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference
between the planned central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-57
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 242/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use thedefault value.
Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the SD
switching function of N+1 protection is
enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-58 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 243/496
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Protection Unit
Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of N+1 protection.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Select Mapping
Way
- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF
ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit
and protection unit that have been set.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
Protection Group Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Group
ID
- - This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switchingoccurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-59
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 244/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information
about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
- - This parameter indicates the local end or
remote end.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-60 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 245/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
HSB l This parameter specifies the working
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-61
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 246/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the
reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board
of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection
board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 247/496
Protection Group Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Group
ID
- - This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
HSB l This parameter indicates the working
mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive thesame signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Revertive Mode l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive Mode.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-63
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 248/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of
Device
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of
Channel
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable ReverseSwitching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 249/496
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board
and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - This parameter indicates the names and
ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the working state
on the equipment side.
Signal Status of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the status of the
link signal.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-65
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 250/496
Parameters for Configuring the IF
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information. The work modes
of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
link must be the same.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IFU2
board and the IFX2 board.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-66 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 251/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable AM Disabled
Enabled
Disable l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Channel Space 7M
14M
28M
56M
7M Channel Space indicates the channel
spacing of the corresponding radio link.
This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Guaranteed
Capacity
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according tothe planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-67
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 252/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Full Capacity
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTEFull Capacity Modulation must be higher than
Guaranteed E1 Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Disabled.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this
parameter depends on Channel Spaceand Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not
configurable.
l When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this
parameter depends on Channel Space
and Manually Specified Modulation
Mode and is not configurable.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Specified Max E1
Capacity
- - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed
E1 Capacity.
The E1 Capacity must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-68 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 253/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link ID
does not match the preset value of Link
ID at the local end, the local end inserts
the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates the received ID of
the radio link.
NOTEWhen the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC
function is enabled, the transmit power of
the transmitter automatically varieswithin the specified ATPC range
according to the change of the RSL at the
receive end.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-69
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 254/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC AutomaticThreshold Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled If the OptiX RTN 950 is interconnected with
the packet radio equipment, this parameter
is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter
is set to Disabled.
NOTEThis parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-70 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 255/496
Parameters for Configuring the ODU
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
TX Frequency
(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,the channel central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower TX
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radiolink should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
frequency of the ODU.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-71
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 256/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,
the TX frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower
than the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating
that the T/R spacing supported by the
ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
TX Power(dBm) - - l
This parameter indicates or specifies thetransmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
l The transmit power of the ODU should
be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l
Consider the receive power of the ODUat the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-72 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 257/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater thanthe preset value of TX Low Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low
Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
ATPC function is enabled.
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-73
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 258/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
- - l This parameter is used to set the expected
receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l This parameter needs to be according to
the planning.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-74 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 259/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information.
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute
Mute
Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to unmute.
Actual TX Status Unmute
Mute
- This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.
Equipment Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-75
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 260/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 261/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 262/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1
Protection)
Revertive (1:NProtection)
l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-78 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 263/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is supported at the early
stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Select Mapping
Direction
West Working Unit
West Protection
Unit
West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of the linear MSP.
Select MappingMode
- - l
This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as West
Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West Protection
Unit and the line port mapped as West
Working Unit should be configured for
different boards if possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot
mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-79
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 264/496
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Group
ID
- - This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
Protection Type 1+1 Protection
1:N Protection
- l This parameter indicates the protection
type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services areinterrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted or
several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
l
In dual-ended mode, the switching occursat both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-80 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 265/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the linear MSP.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the switching
state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-81
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 266/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
- l The new protocol is supported at the early
stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and the
restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status
of the linear MSP.
Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the
units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the protection status.
West Line -
-
- This parameter indicates the west protection
unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status
- - This parameter indicates the switching
status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working
channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
- - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-
Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-82 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 267/496
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_CreationThis parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create.
ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-83
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 268/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to the
service sink and the cross-connections
from the service sink to the service
source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-84 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 269/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No
Yes l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configuredservice.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCPService Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
l Click Create SNCP Service.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-85
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 270/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
l When this parameter is set to
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
SCNP service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Hold-off Time(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l If multiple link-based protection
schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than theswitching duration for the multiple link-
based protection schemes.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-86 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 271/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use thecomma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-87
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 272/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent
Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter specifies whether toimmediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH ServiceConfiguration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-
click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-88 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 273/496
3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the
SNCP service.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
SNCP service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter
value is VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delayof time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l If multiple link-based protection
schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than the
switching duration for the multiple link-
based protection schemes.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, itis recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-89
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 274/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-90 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 275/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discretenumbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent
Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou do not select this checkbox.
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configured
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Configuration from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-91
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 276/496
Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service sink.
Activation Status Yes
No
- This parameter indicates whether to activate
the service.
Bound Group
Number
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-92 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 277/496
Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service
protection type of the protection group.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-93
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 278/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, VC12 is displayed.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current
switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode Revertive
Non-Revertive
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the service.l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Revertive.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-94 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 279/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the hold-off time.
l
When a line is faulty, SNCP switchingcan be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l If multiple link-based protection
schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than the
switching duration for the multiple link-
based protection schemes.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-95
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 280/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Initiation
Condition
TIM
EXC
SD
UNEQ
Null
Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the
conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l If TIM is selected, the SNCP service
considers the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm
as an automatic switching condition.
l If EXC is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_EXC or BIP _EXC
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l If SD is selected, the SNCP service
considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as
an automatic switching condition.
l If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP serviceconsiders the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
l It is recommended that you set Initiation
Condition to the same condition for
Working Service and Protection
Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
Initiation Condition are optional values
not included in the default values, and
they are set according to the planninginformation.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the
working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
A.7 Clock ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-96 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 281/496
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling StatusThis topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-97
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 282/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Clock Source - - l External clock source 1
indicates the externalclock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 7.
External clock source 2
indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 8.
l
The internal clock source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
indicates the type of the
external clock source
signal.
l This parameter is set
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-98 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 283/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
l This parameter needs to
be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority
Sequence (1 is the
highest)
- - Displays the priority
sequence of clock sources.
1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Affiliated Subnet 0 to 255 0 l This parameter is used
when the clock subnet
needs to be created on
the NMS.
l The NEs that trace the
same clock source
should be allocated
with the same clock
subnet ID.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-99
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 284/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protection Status Start Extended SSM
Protocol
Start Standard SSMProtocol
Stop SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
scheme used for
synchronous
management on an
SDH network and
indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes. The
SSM protocol ensures
that the equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality andhighest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard SSM
protocol is started, the
NE first performs the
protection switching on
the clock source
according to the clock
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If thequality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the protection
switching according to
the clock priority table.
That is, the NE selects
an unlocked clock
source that is of the
highest quality and
highest priority from all
the current available
clock sources as the
clock source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-100 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 285/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 286/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 287/496
Parameters for Clock Source Quality
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates
the name of theconfigured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configuration Quality Unknown
Synchronization Quality
G.811 Clock Signal
G.812 Transit Clock
SignalG.812 Local Clock Signal
G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies
the quality level that is
configured for the clock
source. This function is
required only in a special
scenario or in a test.Generally, this parameter
need not be set.
Clock Quality - - This parameter indicates
the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE Name - - This parameter indicatesthe name of the NE.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-103
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 288/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 289/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level of
the local exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812 but
higher than the quality
level of the clock signal
of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
lower than the quality
level of the clock signal
of the SETS but higher
than the quality level
unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM OutputControl
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the SSM Output Control tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-105
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 290/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source byoutputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Control Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter is valid
only when the SSM
protocol or the
extended SSM protocol
is started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set this parameter to
Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to
Disabled.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock IDEnabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock ID Status tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-106 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 291/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source byoutputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Enabled Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter is valid
only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
l This parameter
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports areconnected to the NEs in
the same clock subnet
and if the extended
SSM protocol is started
on the opposite NE, this
parameter is set to
Enabled. Otherwise,
this parameter is set to
Disabled.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_ClockSource Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-107
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 292/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock
Source Reversion Mode
Auto-Revertive
Non-Revertive
Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a
higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source. If
this parameter is set to
Auto-Revertive, the
NE automatically
switches the clock source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE does
not automatically
switch the clock source
to the higher-priority
clock source when this
higher-priority clock source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality, select
Auto-Revertive.
Otherwise, to prevent
jitter of the clock,generally, it is
recommended that you
set this parameter to
Non-Revertive.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-108 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 293/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Clock Source WTR
Time(min.)
0 to 12 5 l This parameter
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
unstability of the clock
source state within a
short time.l This parameter is valid
only when Higher
Priority Clock Source
Reversion Mode is set
to Auto-Revertive.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock
Source Switching This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionClock Source - - This parameter indicates
the name of the clock
source.
Effective Status Valid
Invalid
- This parameter indicates
whether the clock source
is valid.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-109
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 294/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Lock Status Lock
Unlock
- l This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source in
the priority table is in
the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock source
in the priority table is in
the unlocked state. The
clock source in the
unlocked state can be
switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates
the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
- This parameter indicates
the switching status of the
current clock source.
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of theExternal Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock .
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
External Clock Source 1
External Clock Source 2
- This parameter indicates
the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-110 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 295/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
External Clock Output
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.
l This parameter needs to
be set according to the
requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2 Mbit/
s signal.
External Clock Output
Timeslot
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Output Mode isset to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
l If this parameter is set
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used totransmit the SSM.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-111
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 296/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
External Source Output
Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Not Inferior to G.813
SETS Signal Not Inferior to G.812
Local Signal
Not Inferior to G.812
Transit Clock Signal
Not Inferior to G.811
Clock Signal
Threshold Disabled l This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than the
value of this parameter,
it indicates that the
external clock source
does not output any
clock signal.
l If this parameter is set
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputsthe clock signal.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition l This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2 Mbit/
s phase-locked clock
source.
l
It is recommended thatyou use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS
Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
only when 2M Phase-
Locked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
No Failure Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the failure
conditions.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-112 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 297/496
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
NE Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
NE Clock Working
Mode
- - This parameter indicates
the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Information
- - This parameter indicates
the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Synchronous
Source
- - This parameter indicates
the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicatesthe synchronization
source.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-113
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 298/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Data Output Method in
Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output
Mode
Keep the Latest Data
Normal Data Output
Mode
l When all the reference
timing signals are lost,
the slave clock changes
to the holdover mode.
At this time, the slave
clock works based on
the latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slaveclock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output
Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored before the reference
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on the
size of the phase-
locked clock register on
the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock worksin holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-114 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 299/496
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line ServiceThis topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
UNI-UNI l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-115
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 300/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
TransparentlyTransmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets. It
is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparentlytransmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning information.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-116 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 301/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source Port - - l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-117
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 302/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l This parameter is validonly when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Sink VLANs.
Otherwise, you need to
create a VLAN
forwarding table for
swapping VLAN IDs.
l If this parameter is setto null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Bearer Type QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link tocarry the E-Line
service.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-NNI.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 303/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
QinQ Link ID - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID.
l A QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link .
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-NNI.
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line
service.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the first QinQ
link.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link .
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link l Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Lineservice.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the second QinQ
link.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to NNI-NNI.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link .
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-119
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 304/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Sink Port - - l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
planning information.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) toseparate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number of VLANs
must be the same value
of Source VLANs.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
at the sink port are used
as the service sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used as
the service sink.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 305/496
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation PathSelect the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node - - This parameter indicates
the source node.
Sink Node - - This parameter indicates
the sink node.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte) 1518 to 9600 - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-121
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 306/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
TransparentlyTransmitted
- l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
This parameter is used
to indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparentlytransmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Active Active
Inactive
- This parameter indicates
whether E-Line service is
active.
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionPort - - This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-122 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 307/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
of the UNI work as theservice source or
service sink.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-123
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 308/496
Parameters Associated with NNI Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
l This parameter is preset
in QinQ Link .
Parameters for the Port Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the QinQ link ID of the
QinQ link connected to
the port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-124 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 309/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable Port - - l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is preset
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
Encapsulation Type Null
802.1Q
QinQ
- l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the process of creating an
E-Line service.
l If this parameter is set
to Null, the port
transparently transmits
the received packets.
l If this parameter is set
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q standard.l If this parameter is set
to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is preset
in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
l This parameter
indicates the tag of the
port.
l This parameter is preset
in Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet
Interface .
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-125
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 310/496
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding TableItem_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies
the source interface.
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies
the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-126 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 311/496
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
cannot be set manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-127
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 312/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-128 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 313/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MACaddress forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table needs to be
configured. Otherwise,
the Ethernet LAN fails
to forward the services.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
- - l This parameter
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-129
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 314/496
Parameters for UNIs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to representa consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, all the services
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
l
If this parameter is notset to null, only the
services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-130 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 315/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 316/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-132 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 317/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets andcannot be set manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-133
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 318/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MACaddress according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-134 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 319/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MAC Address Learning
Mode
- - l This parameter
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Parameters for UNIs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-135
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 320/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l If this parameter is set
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port. That
is, the entire port is
mounted to the bridge.
l If this parameter is set
to a non-null value,only the corresponding
UNI port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Parameters for NNIs
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 321/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
SVLANs - - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.
l This parameter can be
set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset static
MAC address entriesare valid for only the
VLANs whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-137
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 322/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MAC Address - - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not aged
automatically and
needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-138 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 323/496
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLAN ID - 1 l This parameter is
invalid if MACAddress Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for only the VLANs whose
VLAN ID is equal to
the preset VLAN ID.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
MAC Address - - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC addressis also called a dynamic
MAC address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to
the MAC address.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-139
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 324/496
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Aging Ability Enabled
Disabled
Enabled The OptiX RTN 950
supports enabling/disabling of the aging
function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Aging Time(min) - 5
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLAN ID - 1 This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-140 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 325/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MAC Address - - l This parameter
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an entry,
also called a black hole
entry, whose data
frame that contains a
specific destination
MAC address. A
disabled MAC addressneeds to be set
manually and cannot be
aged.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Frame Type Unicast
Multicast
1 This parameter indicates
the type of the receivedunknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard
Broadcast
Broadcast Selects the method of
processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-141
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 326/496
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter
indicates the ID of thesplit horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
l
The port members thatare added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Maintenance Association Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created maintenance
association.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-142 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 327/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Association Name
- - l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
10s
1m
10m
1s l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC test.
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
Parameters for the MEP
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
association of the created MEP.
Node - - This parameter indicates the MEP node.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of
the MEP.
l "Ingress" indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and "Egress" indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-143
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 328/496
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTEThe OptiX RTN 950
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies
the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-144 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 329/496
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly
Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-145
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 330/496
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NEmust be different from
each other.
East Port - - This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPLOwner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
No l This parameter
specifies whether thenode on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
RPL Port - - l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l
There is only one RPL port and this RPL port
must be the east or west
port on the RPL owner
node.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-146 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 331/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APSchannel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-147
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 332/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates
the ID of the ERPSinstance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
- This parameter indicates
whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates
the RPL port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets onthe dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-148 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 333/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating the
protection switchingsequence when the
ERPS coexists with
other protection
schemes so that the
fault can be rectified in
the case of other
protection switching
(such as LAG
protection) before the
ERPS occurs. When a
node on the ring detects
one or more new faults,it starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset hold-
off time is set to a value
that is not 0. During the
hold-off time, the fault
is not reported to
trigger an ERPS. When
the hold-off timer times
out, the node checks the
link status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can be
the same as or different
from the fault that
triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-149
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 334/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the ring
receives the outdated
R-APS packets, an
incorrect ERPS mayoccur. The ERPS guard
timer is an R-APS timer
used for preventing a
node on the ring from
receiving outdated R-
APS packets. When a
faulty node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer expires.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-150 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 335/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
WTR Time(min) 5 to 12, in step of 1 - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers to
the duration from the
time when the working
channel is restored to
the time when the
switching is released.
When the working
channel is restored, the
WTR timer of the RPL
owner starts up. Inaddition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted.
In addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by the
unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10 - This parameter displays or
specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 - This parameter indicates
or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates
the last switching request.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-151
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 336/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
RB Status - - This parameter indicates
the RB status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB (RPL Blocked):
The RPL is blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates
the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is requested to
clear the forwarding
address table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain theDNF flags. In this case,
the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed not
to clear the forwarding
address table.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-152 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 337/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Status of State Machine - - This parameter indicates
the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receive the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with
Current Packet
- - This parameter indicates
the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC addressof the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port GroupCreation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-153
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 338/496
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Protocol Type MSTP
STP
MSTP This parameter specifies
the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled
Disabled l
This parameter specifies whether to
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the port
group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a result,
the services are
interrupted.
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates
the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-154 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 339/496
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port GroupConfiguration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicatesthe selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ BridgeParameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-155
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 340/496
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
indicates the ID of the port group.
l This parameter can be
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 950 doesnot support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Bridge Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
port group.
l This parameter can be
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-156 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 341/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches that
are connected to the
link. When you set
Network Diameter for
the switches, the MSTP
automatically sets Max
Age(s), Hello Time(s),and Forward Delay(s)
to the more appropriate
values for the switches.
l If the value of Network
Diameter is greater,
the network is in a
larger scale.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packetsthrough the bridge.
l The greater the value of
this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-157
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 342/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridgedetects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.
Port ParametersParameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-158 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 343/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable Edge Attribute Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or
transmit BPDU
messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicatesthe actual management
edge attributes of the port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-159
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 344/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Point-to-Point Attribute false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
l If this parameter is set
to auto, the bridgedetermines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
according to the actual
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point-
to-Point Attribute isfalse.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute
- - This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-160 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 345/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Max Transmit Packet
Count
1 to 255 3 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs to
be set according to the
planning information.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CISTParameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Group - - This parameter specifies
the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates
the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). TheOptiX RTN
950 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-161
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 346/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant 16
bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge whose
MAC address is the
smallest is selected as
the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-162 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 347/496
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP
STP
Disabled l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-163
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 348/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
l The most significant 16
bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l
If the priorities of allthe bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge whose
MAC address is the
smallest is selected as
the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC
Address
- - This parameter indicates
the MAC address of theroot bridge.
External Path Cost
ERPC
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
Priority
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
MAC Address
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-164 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 349/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter
indicates the priority of
the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates
the root port.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value of
this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-165
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 350/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.
MST Domain Max HopCount
- - The OptiX RTN 950 doesnot support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change
Time(s)
- - This parameter indicates
the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the count of the topologychanges.
Port Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port in the port group.
Enable Protocol EnabledDisabled
Disabled This parameter indicateswhether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - - This parameter indicates
the role of a port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-166 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 351/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 352/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher.
Design Port - - This parameter indicates
the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or transmit BPDU
messages.
l This parameter can be
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
recommended that youuse the default value.
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
- - This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-168 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 353/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Point to Point false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute
l If this parameter is set
to auto, the bridgedetermines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
according to the actual
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is half-
duplex, Actual Point
to Point Attribute isfalse.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-169
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 354/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
1 to 255 3 l This parameter
indicates the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode STP
MSTP
- l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter
indicates the intervalfor transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value of
this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-170 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 355/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridgedetects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter
specifies the holding
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
l The greater the value,the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >EthernetProtocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-171
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 356/496
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionService ID - - This parameter indicates
the service ID.
Enabled Protocol Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter
specifies whether to
enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
l If the bridge accesses a
LAN where the IGMP
multicast server exists,
you can enable the
IGMP Snooping
protocol according to
the requirement.
Router Port Aging Time
(min)
1 to 120 8 l If an entry is not
updated in a certain
period (that is, no
IGMP query packet is
received), this entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is
called aging, and this
period is called aging
time.
l If this parameter is set
to a very large value,
the bridge stores
excessive multicast
entries that are
outdated.
Consequently, the
resources of the
multicast table are
exhausted.l If this parameter is set
to a very small value,
the bridge may delete
the multicast entry that
is required.
Consequently, the
forwarding efficiency
decreases.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-172 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 357/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maximum Times of No
Response from Multicast
Members
1 to 4 3 l This parameter
specifies the maximum
number of multicast
group members who do
not respond.
l If the IEEE 802.1q
bridge transmits an
IGMP group query
packet to the multicast
member ports, the
IEEE 802.1q bridge
starts the timer for the
query of the maximum
number of responses. If
no IGMP report packets are received
within the query time,
the IEEE 802.1q bridge
adds one to the number
of no responses at the
port. When the number
of no responses
exceeds the preset
value of Maximum
Times of No Response
from Multicast
Members, the IEEE802.1q bridge deletes
the additional multicast
members from the
multicast group.
Maximum Number of
Multicast Groups
- - l This parameter
specifies the maximum
number of allowable
multicast groups.
l The multicast group
records the mapping
relations between the
ports on the router,
MAC multicast
addresses, and member
ports in the multicast
group.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-173
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 358/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maximum Number of
Multicast Group
Members
- - l This parameter
specifies the maximum
number of allowable
multicast group
members.
l A multicast group
member refers to the
host that is added to a
multicast group.
Actual Multicast Count - - This parameter indicates
the number of actually
used multicast groups.
Actual Multicast
Members Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of actually
used multicast group
members.
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
3. Click Add.
Parameters for Fast Leave Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter indicates
the service ID.
VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter
specifies the VLAN
where the port to be
quickly deleted is
located.
l This parameter needs to
be set according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-174 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 359/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Type V-UNI
V-NNI
V-UNI l This parameter
specifies the type of the
port to be quickly
deleted.
l This parameter needs to
be set according to the
planning information.
Port - - This parameter specifies
the port to be quickly
deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
Parameters for Router Port Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter specifies
the ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the router port.
Port - - This parameter indicates
the router port.
Port Status - - This parameter indicates
the status of the router
port.
Port Creating Time - - This parameter indicates
the time when the router
port is created.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-175
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 360/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port Remainder Aging
Time(min)
- - This parameter indicates
the remaining aging time
of the router port.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >EthernetProtocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Router Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter specifies
the ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates
the available ports.
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates
the specified router port.
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-176 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 361/496
Parameters for Multicast Groups Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter specifies
the ID of the created E-LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
the multicast MAC
address.
Multicast Groups Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the multicast
group.
Multicast Group
Creating Time
- - This parameter indicates
the time when the
multicast group is set up.
Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter specifiesthe ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the
multicast group member.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the multicast
group member.
Port - - This parameter indicates
the multicast group
member port.
Port Remainder Aging
Times
- - This parameter indicates
the remaining non-
response times of the
multicast group member
port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-177
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 362/496
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter specifies
the ID of the created E-
LAN service.
VLAN ID 1 1 to 4094 This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address - - This parameter specifies
the multicast MAC
address.
Available Port - - This parameter indicatesthe available interfaces.
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates
the preset port of the
multicast group members.
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Packet Statistics tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-178 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 363/496
Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Service ID - - This parameter indicates
the service ID.
VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates
the VLAN ID of the
service.
Port Type - - This parameter indicates
the port type.
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port.
Packet Statistics Status Clear
Start
Stop
Clear This parameter indicates
or specifies the status of collecting the packet
statistics.
IGMPv1 Query Packet
Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of received
IGMPv1 query packets.
IGMPv2 Query Packet
Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of received
IGMPv2 query packets.
IGMPv3 Query Packet
Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of received
IGMPv3 query packets.
IGMP Leaving Packet
Count
- - This parameter displays
the number of leaving
packets that are received.
IGMPv1 Member
Report Packet Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of received
packets that are reported
by the IGMPv1 members.
IGMPv2 MemberReport Packet Count - - This parameter indicatesthe number of received
packets that are reported
by the IGMPv2 members.
IGMPv3 Member
Report Packet Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of received
packets that are reported
by the IGMPv3 members.
Unrecognized or
Unprocessed Packet
Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of packets that
cannot be recognized or
processed.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-179
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 364/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Discarded Incorrect
Packet Count
- - This parameter indicates
the number of discarded
error packets.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link AggregationManagement_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
LAG No. 1 to 16 1 l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
l This parameter is valid
only when
Automatically Assign
is not selected.
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter
indicates whether LAG
No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,LAG No. cannot be set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies
the LAG name.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-180 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 365/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
LAG Type Static
Manual
Static l Static: You can create a
LAG. When you add or
delete a member port to
or from the LAG, the
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP) protocol is
required. In a LAG, a
port can be in the
Selected or Standby
state. The aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the same
among all the nodes.
l Manual: You can
manually create a LAG.
When you add or delete
a member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. According to the physical up or down
state, the port
determines whether to
perform an
aggregation.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-181
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 366/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Revertive Mode Revertive
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter can be
set only when Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l When a LAG is set to
Revertive, the services
are switched back to the
former working
channel after this
channel is restored to
normal.
l When a LAG is set to
Non-Revertive, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Load Sharing Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing l Sharing: Each member
link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. Thesharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only one
member link of a LAG
carries traffic, and theother link is in the
standby state. In this
case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-182 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 367/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm
Source MAC
Destination MAC
Source and DestinationMAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
Source MAC l This parameter is valid
only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is set
to Sharing.
l The load sharing
computation methods
include: MAC address
specific allocation
(based on the source
MAC address,
destination MAC
address, and XOR
between source MAC
address and source
MAC address), IPaddress specific
allocation (based on the
source IP address,
destination IP address,
and XOR between
source IP address and
source IP address).
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-183
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 368/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priority of
a LAG. The smaller the
value of System
Priority, the higher the
priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority isconsidered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered as
the result of both LAGs
and is used to ensure
that the aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
Port Settings Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Main Board - - l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-184 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 369/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Main Port - - l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to theslave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave
Ports)
- - l This parameter
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Port (Available Slave
Ports)
- - l This parameter
specifies the salve portin a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Slave Ports - - This parameter indicates
the selected slave ports.
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_PortPriority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >InterfaceManagement > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-185
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 370/496
2. Click the Port Priority tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value DescriptionPort - - This parameter indicates
the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG as
defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher the
priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the
convergence point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the
board of the convergence point.
NOTEOne port can be in an LPT only.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-186 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 371/496
Parameters for Access Points
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter specifies the board at the
access point.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port on the
board of the access point.
NOTEThe access point supports selection of multiple
ports on different boards.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port
Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2. Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Mirror Name - - l This parameter specifies the name of the
mirroring task.
l After the mirroring function of the port is
enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored
ports by analyzing the packets at the
mirroring port only. As a result, you can
easily manage the ports.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction in
which the service to be monitored.
l Ingress indicates that the Listened Portcopies the received packets to the Mirror
Listener Port and sends the packets out
of the Mirror Listener Port.
l Egress indicates that the Listened Port
copies the transmitted packets to the
Mirror Listener Port and sends the
packets out of the Mirror Listener
Port.
Mirror Listener
Port
- - l This parameter specifies the mirroring
listener port and the listened port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-187
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 372/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Listened Port - - l Listened Port indicates the source port
of the mirrored packets.
l
Mirror Listener Port indicates the portfrom which the packets copied from the
Listened Port are sent out.
l Mirror Listener Port: The port where
services are available cannot be selected.
Otherwise, the creation fails.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration andmaintenance (OAM).
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-188 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 373/496
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
l This parameter can contain a maximumof eight bytes.
Maintenance
Domain Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 l This parameter specifies the level of the
maintenance domain.
l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,
the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.
l When the value is set to 0, the
maintenance domain is at the lowest
level. The values 1-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.l The OAM packets whose level is higher
than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are responded
to or terminated by the MEPs according
to the message type.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Maintenance Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-189
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 374/496
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service
instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
10s
1 min
10 min
1s l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC.
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-190 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 375/496
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
association of the created MEP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MEP is located.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l This parameter specifies the direction of
the MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-191
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 376/496
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
association of the created MEP.
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(_e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the
remote MEP.
l If other MEPs may initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MIP is located.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-192 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 377/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.
l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MIP ID, which is unique in themaintenance domain. The MIP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
NOTETo create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MP ID Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Sink Maintenance
Point MAC
Address
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-193
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 378/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP can be set to thedestination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Transmitted
Packet Count
1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of
packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a
transmitted LBM packet.l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted
Packet Priority
0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of
transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant
information and result of the LB test.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAMManagement_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-194 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 379/496
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MP ID Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Sink Maintenance
Point MACAddress
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MACaddresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LT test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
destination maintenance point.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-195
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 380/496
Parameters for the Detection Result
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Source
Maintenance PointID
- - This parameter indicates the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of
hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or to
the destination maintenance point in the
LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding point
occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result -
-
- This parameter indicates the result of the LT
test.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-196 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 381/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, thecurrent Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
OAM Working
Mode
Active
Passive
Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the
working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can be
reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-197
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 382/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Loopback Status Non-Loopback
Initiate Loopback at
Local
Respond Loopback
of Remote
- This parameter indicates the loopback status
at the local end.
NOTELoopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback .
OAM Discovery
Status
FAULT
ACTIVE_SEND_L
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
- This parameter indicates the OAM
discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit
Status
FWD
DISCARD
- l This parameter indicates the status of
transmitting packets at the local end.
l When a port is in the FWD state, the port
forwards the non-OAM packets. When a
port is in the DISCARD state, the port
discards the non-OAM packets.
Port Receive Status FWD
DISCARD
LB
- l This parameter indicates the status of
receiving packets at the local end.
l In the FWD state, the port forwards the
non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the
port loopback the non-OAM packets. In
the DISCARD state, the port discards the
non-OAM packets.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-198 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 383/496
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAMManagement_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Ethernet
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frame)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frames.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frame)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring the error frame period.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60 This parameter specifies the time window of
monitoring the error frame second.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-199
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 384/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frame seconds.
l If any error frame occurs in one second,this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Second Threshold(s), an alar m is
reported.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Window
(Entries)
1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame signal period.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in
step of 1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring the error frame signal period.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of error
signals exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries) , an alarm is
reported.
A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_ModificationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_CreationThis topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-200 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 385/496
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates
the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
indicates the priority of
the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l
C-VLAN indicates theclient-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
indicates the priority of
the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-201
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 386/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-202 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 387/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB) service
class of the DiffServ
domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the forwarding
behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTEThe AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-203
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 388/496
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHBservice class of the
DiffServ domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the forwarding
behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirementsof the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTEThe AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter indicates the priority of
the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-204 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 389/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
indicates the priority of
the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
l The DSCP refers to bits0-5 of the DS field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
CVLAN The packets trusted by the
OptiX RTN 950 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, or DSCP value.
By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the
BE service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTEThe E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-205
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 390/496
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ DomainManagement_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 2 This parameter specifies
the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Packet Type cvlan
svlan
ip-dscp
cvlan l This parameter
specifies the type of the
packet.
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 950 arethe C_VLAN,
S_VLAN and IP DSCP
packets that contain the
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
NOTEThe E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping
Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. Thedefault DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-206 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 391/496
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
l The differentiated
services code point(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-207
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 392/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the forwarding
behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DS
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTEThe AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-208 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 393/496
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHBservice class of the DS
domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the forwarding
behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DS
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirementsof the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTEThe AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-209
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 394/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
SVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
l The differentiatedservices code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays
the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mappingrelations between DS
domains.
Selected Port - - This parameter displays
the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-210 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 395/496
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain AppliedPort_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3. Click the Apply Port tab.
4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied PortsParameter Value Range Default Value Description
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-211
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 396/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Packet Type CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
CVLAN l This parameter
specifies the type of the
packet.
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 950 are
the C-VLAN, S-VLAN
and IP-DSCP packets
that contain the C-
VLAN priority, S-
VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
l When the OptiX RTN
950 receives services
and identifies service
types based on VLAN
priorities, the trusted
packets at a UNI ports
carry C-VLAN
priorities, and the
trusted packets at an
NNI port carry S-
VLAN priorities.
When the OptiX RTN
950 receives services
and identifies service
types based on DSCP
values, the trusted
packets at a port carry
IP-DSCP values.
NOTEThe E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the port is
located.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates
the available port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-212 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 397/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates
the selected port.
The selected port isapplied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950,Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied
to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter
indicates the policy ID
of the port.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the policy
name of the port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-213
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 398/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 950
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class isapplicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-214 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 399/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithmdivides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithmand the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-215
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 400/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
l This parameter can be
set only whenGrooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR .
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether traffic shaping
is enabled for an egress
queue corresponding toa PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-216 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 401/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is
directly forwarded; if
the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded at
a rate equal to the PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and
then are forwarded at a
rate equal to the PIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in
a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-217
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 402/496
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Policy ID 1 to 36 - l This parameter
specifies the policy IDof the port.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies
whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies
the policy name of the
port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-218 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 403/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 950
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class isapplicable to the traffic
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-219
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 404/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithmdivides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
scheduling algorithm
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
scheduling algorithmand the value of the SP
scheduling algorithm
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-220 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 405/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 406/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is
directly forwarded; if
the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded at
a rate equal to the PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and
then are forwarded at a
rate equal to the PIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the valueof the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in
a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-222 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 407/496
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic ClassificationConfiguration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the traffic
classification.
ACL Action Permit
Deny
Permit l The access control list
(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets that
enter the port according
to the specified
matching rules.
l When this parameter isset to Permit, the ACL
on the ingress side
filters the packets that
enter the port. Only the
packets that match the
specified rules can be
received by the port.
l When this parameter is
set to Deny, ACL
processing is not
performed for the
packets over the ingress
port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-223
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 408/496
Ingress Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And And l This parameter
specifies the logicalrelationship between
the traffic classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
Match Type DSCP Value
CVlan IDCVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
- l After you click Add or
Delete, complex traffic
classification can be
performed on the traffic
that enters the ingress
port according to the
preset matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex traffic
classification can be
divided into basic
traffic types according
to the DSCP value,
C_VLAN ID,C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN ID, or
S_VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based on
the associated Ethernet
packets. Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63CVlan ID: 1 to 4094
CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
- l
If the matching value of the packets is the same
as the preset Match
Value, the packets
match the rules of
complex traffic
classification.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-224 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 409/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CoS -
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
l If this parameter is set
to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Bandwidth Limit Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l This parameter
indicates or specifies
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-225
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 410/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These packets
are first forwarded in
the case of network
congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass therestriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-226 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 411/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
packets is more than the
PIR, the packets that
exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded tothe next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-227
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 412/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
CBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,
if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is not more than
the CIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
can be first forwarded
in the case of network
congestion. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
l This parameter is setaccording to the
planning information.
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain period,
if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
marked yellow. Themaximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed by
the equipment on the
packets. The packetsare dyed according to
the result of the CAR
operation. The dying
rule is determined by
the comparison
between the rate of the
packets and the preset
CAR value.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports Color
Blindness only.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-228 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 413/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Packet Color Red
Yellow
Green
- Packets can be dyed in
three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard
Pass
Remark
- l This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
that the packets are
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port.
Relabeled CoS CS7
CS6EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- If the handling method is
set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the packets.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-229
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 414/496
Egress Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Bandwidth Limit Disabled
Enable
Enable l This parameter
indicates or specifieswhether the traffic
shaping is performed in
the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
l This parameter is set
according to the planning information.
CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: When the
rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR,
these packets directly
enter the egress queue.
l In the case that certain
packets exist in the
egress queue: The packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-230 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 415/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: If the rate
of the packets is more
than the CIR but is not
more than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR enter
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.
If the rate of the packets
is more than the PIR,
the packets are directly
discarded.l In the case that certain
packets exist in the
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets are directly
transmitted. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-231
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 416/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the packets
is more than the CIR
but is not more than the
PIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets enter the egress
queue. The maximum
traffic of the burst
packets is determined
by the PBS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Slot No. - - This parameter specifies
the slot ID.
Port - - This parameter specifies
the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses thesingle token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 950 processes the
packets in the buffer
queue through the
CBS (byte) - -
PIR (kbit/s) - -
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-232 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 417/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
PBS (byte) - - following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is
directly forwarded; if
the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded at
a rate equal to the PIR.l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in
a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and
then are forwarded at a
rate equal to the PIR.
A.12 RMON ParametersThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-233
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 418/496
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control GroupThis topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_StatisticsGroup
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be
monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of themonitoring period.
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the displayed
value is an absolute value that is currently
stored in the register.
Display Mode Graphics
List
List l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-234 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 419/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 420/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
l This parameter is valid only whenDisplay Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance
items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value
of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of
each performance event.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_HistoryControl Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
Custom Period 1 EnabledDisabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable Custom Period 1.
Custom Period 2 Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable Custom Period 2.
History Register
Count(1-50)
1 to 50 16
6(Custom Period 2)
This parameter indicates or specifies the
quantity of the history registers.
Period Length(300
to 43200 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 43200 900 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 1.
l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-236 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 421/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Period Length(300
to 86400 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 86400 86400 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 2.
l The value must be an integer multiple of 30.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be
collected.
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
NOTEIn the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Custom Period 1 Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifieswhether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-237
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 422/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Custom Period 2 Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Event Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Event - - This parameter indicates the performanceevent to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
monitoring function.
Custom Period 1 Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on Custom Period 1Custom Period1 Monitor.
Custom Period 2 Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Threshold Detect Report All
Do Not Detect
Report Only the
Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
threshold detection method.
l If the number of detected events reaches
the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, theevents are not reported to the NMS.
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-238 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 423/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each
threshold of the performance events.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring InterfaceThis topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-239
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 424/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Call Waiting Time
(s)
1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting time
after the local station dials the number. If the calling station does not receive the
response message from the called station
within the call waiting time, it
automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to five seconds. If more
than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Dual-Tone
Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode
of the orderwire phone.
Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone
number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When a OptiX RTN 950 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 950
receives the call, the orderwire phones on
the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the
orderwire point-to-multipoint group call
changes to a point-to-point call between
two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for all
the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwireconference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-240 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 425/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire
phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l
The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the available port
for the orderwire phone.
Selected
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the selected port
for the orderwire phone.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_AdvancedThis topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E2
E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead
byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the radio
link always uses a customized overhead
byte to transmit the orderwire signals.
Hence, this parameter should be set
according to the occupied SDH overhead
bytes in the ordinary SDH.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-241
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 426/496
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Available Data
Channel
- - l This parameter indicates the available F1
data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for the configuration.
No. - - This parameter indicates the number of the
F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port is
selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
AUX board. The F1/S1 interface
complies with ITU-T G.703 and operates
at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
Data Channel 2
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-242 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 427/496
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical
line, the preset overhead byte is used totransmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data
Source
- No Data l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
- - This parameter indicates the available
broadcast data sink.
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink
- - l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-243
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 428/496
Parameters for the Basic Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Manual Control
Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical
Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in
Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
the relay is set manually for major alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status
for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status of
the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabledstatus for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Parameters for the Input Relay
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the channel.
Using Status Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the input relay is used.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-244 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 429/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/
High Level
Relay Turns On/Low Level
Relay Turns Off/
High Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned off.
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Parameters for the Output Relay
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Output Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the output relay is used.
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the upper
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0 - This parameter specifies the lower
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-245
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 430/496
Parameters for the Alarm Relay
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
This parameter indicates the severity of the
alarm.
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-1
CSK-2
CSK-3
CSK-4
CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
output alarm relay.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of theODU.
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-246 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 431/496
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF interface.
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter indicates or specifies the
ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
l Each radio link of an NE should have a
unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-247
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 432/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Received Radio
Link ID
1 to 4094 - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link IDdoes not match the preset value of Radio
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,
indicating that the link IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback .
2M Wayside
Enable Statusa
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK , or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input
Boarda
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK , or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-248 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 433/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the
status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier
signals at the IF interface.
l This parameter can be set to Start in the
commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted.
XPIC Enabled b Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the XPIC function of the IFX2
board is enabled.
l If the IFX2 board does not perform the
XPIC function, this parameter should be
set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC
cable is required to perform self-loop for the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslotc
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled If the OptiX RTN 950 is interconnected with
the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
l
a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.l b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF interface.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-249
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 434/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabledand if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-250 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 435/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper
AutomaticThreshold(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates that the
equipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
- -
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
56M
7M IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-251
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 436/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
AM Enable Status Disable
Enable
Disable l When this parameter is set to Disable, the
radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
l When this parameter is set to Enable, the
radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the lowest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enable.Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTEModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enable.
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Disable.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-252 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 437/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
- - l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and is not configurable.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and is not
configurable.
E1 Capacity - - This parameter specifies the number of E1
services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the GuaranteedE1 Capacity.
The E1 Capacity must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the
ATPC adjustment.
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of theATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the
ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
- - This parameter indicates the direction of the
adjustment at the port.
Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching
operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the transmitted
power of the port to be switched.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-253
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 438/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Received Power
(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the received power
of the port to be switched.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the
PRBS test.
Direction Cross
Tributary
Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to theDDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s
10min
h
s This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-254 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 439/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio FrequencyAttribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Pathl Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the central frequency of the channel.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the minimum
transmit frequency supported by the
ODU and a half of the channel spacing,
and must not be more than the difference
between the maximum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a
half of the channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-255
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 440/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
frequency of the ODU.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
The Range of
frequency Point
(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the working range
of the frequency of the ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Power Attributes tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-256 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 441/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l
The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of the ODU. This parameter
cannot be set to a value that exceeds the
nominal power rang of the ODU or a
value that exceeds Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm).
l The transmit power of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-257
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 442/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
- - l This parameter is used to set the expected
receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power±3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l This parameter is set according to the
planning information.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the durationwhen the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-258 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 443/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low
Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
ATPC function is enabled.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-259
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 444/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX HighThreshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
transmit power of the ODU.
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Received
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
actual transmit power of the ODU.
Equip Information
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and is irrelevant to the type
of transmitted service.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-260 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 445/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Station Type Tx Low
Tx High
- l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
Standard Power
Output
High Power Output
- This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_EquipmentInformation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. ChooseConfiguration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type PDH
SDH
- l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and is irrelevant to the type
of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of
the ODU.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-261
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 446/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the IF frequency
bandwidth of the ODU.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission
Power Type
- - This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.
Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
time of the ODU.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Board - - This parameter indicates the correspondingODU.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-262 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 447/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
RF Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback .
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.
Actual
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
- This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.
Factory
Information
- - This parameter indicates the manufacturer
information about the ODU.
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-263
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 448/496
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Namea
- - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha Open
Close
Open l This parameter indicates or specifies the
on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Open.
Optical(Electrical)Interface
Loopback a
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies theloopback status on the SDH interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the SDH interfaces. The Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback .
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-264 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 449/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VC4 Loopback b Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status in the VC-4 path.
l Non-Loopback indicates that theloopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4
signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback .
NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
optical interface.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-265
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 450/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Automatic
Shutdown
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the Automatic Laser
Shutdown function is enabled or
disabled for the laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber is
broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser automaticallystarts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On-
test Period(ms)
2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
l Select By Board/Port(Channel).
l Select Port from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-266 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 451/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
signals are looped back.
l This function is used for fault locating for
the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used for
diagnosis and may affect the services thatare transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback .
Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a
path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Non-Loaded
Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the
service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the alarms. If a path
carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-267
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 452/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Retiming Mode Normal
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the
retiming mode of a specific path.
l By using the retiming function, theretiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal, the
retiming function is not used.
l
When this parameter is set to RetimingMode of Tributary Clock , the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the upstream tributary unit traced.,
the retiming function is used with the
clock of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external clock,
instead of the retiming function, should
be used to provide reference clock signals
for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock .
Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services
that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-268 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 453/496
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port name.
Name - - This parameter specifies
the port name.
Enable Port Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter indicates
the working mode of the
port.
Encapsulation Type Null
802.1Q
QinQ
- l This parameter
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
l If you set this
parameter to Null, the
port transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set this
parameter to 802.1Q,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1q
standard.
l If you set this
parameter to QinQ, the
port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1ad
QinQ standard.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-269
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 454/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of
different types support
different working
modes.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in auto-negotiation
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in full-duplex mode, set
the working mode of
the equipment on the
local side to 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l When the equipment on
the opposite side works
in half-duplex mode,set the working mode
of the equipment on the
local side to 10M Half-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, or Auto-
Negotiation depending
on the port rate of the
equipment on the
opposite side.
l The GE optical
interface supports the
1000M full-duplex
mode only.
Max Frame Length
(byte)
1518 to 9600 1522 The value of this
parameter should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-270 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 455/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Auto-Negotiation
Enable
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex l This parameter
specifies the auto-
negotiation capability
of the Ethernet port.
l This parameter is valid
only when Working
Mode is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port
Electrical Port
Optical Port l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the EM6F,
CSHB and CSHC
board supports theoptical port and
electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates
the attribute of the
physical port.
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Flow Control tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port name.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-271
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 456/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 457/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
QinQ Type Domain - - l This parameter
specifies the QinQ type
domain.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as
FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F board.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-273
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 458/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l This parameter
specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
about the TAG flags
and associated frame-
processing methods,
see Table A-1.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), this
parameter is set to Tag
Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), this
parameter is set to
Access.
l If the accessed services
contain tagged frames
and untagged frames,
this parameter is set to
Hybrid.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l
This parameter is validonly when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
l This parameter is set
according to the actual
situations.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-274 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 459/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid
only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the
functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, this
parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames
Port Type of DataFrame
Processing Method
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-275
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 460/496
Port Type of DataFrame
Processing Method
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from theframe and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame isDefault VLAN
ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the portdirectly transmits
the frame.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_AdvancedAttributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters
- - This parameter indicates
the physical parameters of
the port.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-276 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 461/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are looped
back.
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
recommended that you
use the default value.
Loopback Check - - This parameter specifieswhether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Loopback Port
Shutdown
- - This parameter specifies
whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth
(kbit/s)
- - This parameter specifies
the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling BroadcastPacket Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter specifieswhether to limit the traffic
rate of the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in the
total packets. When the
equipment at the opposite
end may encounter a
broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to
Enabled.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-277
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 462/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100 30 When the proportion of
the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
this parameter is set to
30% or higher.
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_BasicAttributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies thecustomized port name.
Port Mode Layer 2 Layer 2 This parameter indicates the working mode
of the Ethernet name.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-278 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 463/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
802.1Q l This parameter specifies the method of
the port to process the received packets.
l If this parameter is set to Null, the porttransparently transmits the received
packets.
l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >Interface
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
- - l This parameter specifies the QinQ type
domain.
l This parameter can be set only when
Encapsulation Type in GeneralAttributes is set to QinQ.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-279
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 464/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Tag Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l This parameter specifies the TAG flag of
a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
methods, see Table A-2.
l If all the accessed services are frames that
contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),
set this parameter to "Tag Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames that
do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-2.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the actual situations.
VLAN Priority 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 l This parameter is valid only when TAG
is set to Access or Hybrid.
l For details about the functions of this
parameter, see Table A-2.
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, this parameter needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
use the default value.
Table A-2 Data frame processing
Status Type of DataFrame Processing MethodTag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-280 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 465/496
Status Type of DataFrame
Processing Method
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The port receives
the frame after theVLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
The port receives
the frame after theVLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLANtag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
directly transmits
the frame.
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_AdvancedAttributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >InterfaceManagement > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-281
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 466/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the
radio link. As the identifier of a radio link,
this parameter is used to prevent incorrect
connections of radio links between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio
Link ID
- - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
l If the value of Received Radio Link ID
does not match with the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. Atthe same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to locate
the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Non-
Loopback .
Composite Port
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status on the compositeinterface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback .
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-282 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 467/496
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
MAC Address - - l This parameter indicates the MAC
address of the port.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - l This parameter indicates the transmit rate
of the local port.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - l This parameter indicates the receive rate
of the local port.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you use the default value.
l The IF1 board does not support this
parameter.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Non-Loopback The IF port on the OptiX RTN 950 does not
support the setting of this parameter.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-283
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 468/496
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be
received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-284 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 469/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 470/496
Parameters for Overhead Termination
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Pass-Through
Auto
Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,
the NE forwards the original overhead
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-throughservice is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
l It is recommended that you use the default
value.
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.
A Parameters Description
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
A-286 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 471/496
Parameters for the Trace Byte
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J2 byte to be received by
the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J2
byte.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that isactually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Sent
- - If the NE at the opposite end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Received
- - If the NE at the local end reports the
LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5)
Received
- - This parameter displays the V5 byte that is
actually received.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
A-287
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 472/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 473/496
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards
Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D l Supports the optical
interface inloop
l Supports the optical
interface outloop
l Supports the VC-4 path
inloop
l Supports the VC-4 pathoutloop
-
SP3S and SP3D l Supports the tributary
inloop
l Supports the tributary
outloop
-
EM6T and EM6F l Supports the Ethernet port
inloop at the MAC layer
l Supports the Ethernet port
inloop at the PHY layer
-
IF1 l Supports the IF port inloop
l Supports the IF port outloop
l Supports the composite port
inloop
l Supports the composite port
outloop
-
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
B-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 474/496
Board Loopback Type Remarks
IFU2 l Supports the IF port inloop
l Supports the IF port outloop
l Supports the composite port
inloop
l Supports the composite port
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IFETH ports
-
IFX2 l Supports the IF port inloop
l Supports the IF port outloop
l Supports the composite port
inloopl Supports the composite port
outloop
l Supports the MAC inloop at
IFETH ports
-
B Board Loopback Types
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 475/496
C Indicators, Weight, and Power
Consumption of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CST
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and
off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded.
On for 300 ms (green) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being
initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered or
being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 476/496
Indicator State Meaning
Off The software runs normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system
in the unprotected system.
The board is in the standby state in the 1+1 protection system.
ACT On (green) The board is in the active state in the 1+1
protection system.
The board is already activated in the
unprotected system.
Off The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
The board is not activated in the
unprotected system.
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSH
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board operates normally.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and
off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded.
On for 300 ms (green) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being
initialized.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 477/496
Indicator State Meaning
On for 100 ms (red) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
On (red) When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The software runs normally.
SYNC On (green) The clock is normal.
On (red) The clock source is lost or is switched.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system
in the unprotected system.
The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
ACT On (green) The board is in the active state in the 1+1
protection system.
The board is already activated in the
unprotected system.
Off The board is in the standby state in the 1
+1 protection system.
The board is not activated in the
unprotected system.
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the IF1
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 478/496
Indicator State Meaning
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not
added on the NMS
l The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and
off for 300 ms repeatedly
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standby
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is not activated
in the unprotected system.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
C-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 479/496
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IFU2
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
LINK On (green) The space link is normal.
On (red) The space link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU works normally.
On (red) l The logical board is not
added on the NMS
l The ODU has critical or
major alarms.
l No power is supplied.
On (yellow) The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) andoff for 300 ms repeatedly
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The equipment at the
opposite end reports an RDI.
Off The equipment at the
opposite end does not report
an RDI.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 480/496
Indicator State Meaning
ACT On (green) l The board is in the active
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is already
activated in the
unprotected system.
Off l The board is in the standby
state in the 1+1 protection
system.
l The board is not activated
in the unprotected system.
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
PROG On for 100 ms (green) and off
for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.
On for 300 ms (green) and off
for 300 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green) The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for
100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
C-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 481/496
Indicator State Meaning
On (red) When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The software is running normally.
LINK1a On (green) The GE1 interface is connected correctly
and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.
Off The GE1 interface is not connected or isconnected incorrectly.
LINK2a On (green) The GE2 interface is connected correctly
and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Flashing (green) The GE2 interface is receiving or
transmitting data.
Off The GE2 interface is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the SL1D
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working
normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or
major alarm occurs in the
service.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-7
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 482/496
Indicator State Meaning
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are notconfigured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical interface of
the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off The first optical interface of
the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical interface
of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical interface
of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is workingnormally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied
to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) Indicates that a critical or major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
occurs in the services.
Off The services are not
configured.
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
C-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 483/496
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the AUX
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working normally.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
SRV On (green) The system is working normally.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs on the
board.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
Table C-9 Description of the power status indicators
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is connected.
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.
Table C-10 Description of the fan status indicators
Indicator State Meaning
FAN On (green) The fan is running normally.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
C-9
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 484/496
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards
Table C-11 Weight and power consumption of boards
Boards Weight (kg) Power consumption (W)CST 0.72 kg < 20.7 W
CSH 0.74 kg < 25.3 W
IF1 0.72 kg < 12 W
IFU2 0.79 kg < 23 W
IFX2 0.80 kg < 33 W
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6F 0.38 kg < 11.3 W
SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W
SP3S 0.54 kg < 5.7 W
SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W
AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W
PIU 0.12 kg < 0.5 W
FAN 0.30 kg < 4.0 W (room temperature)
< 29.6 W (high temperature)
C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
C-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 485/496
D Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
Number
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/
1.75 in.)
1+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one
protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of
a radio link.
A
Adaptive
modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode
based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the
equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the
transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When
the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency
modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
Add/Drop
multiplexer
A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal
to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
Adjacent
channelalternate
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a
horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmittwo signals.
Automatic
transmit power
control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit
signal detected at the receiver.
C
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description D Glossary
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 486/496
Co-channel
dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization
wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The co-
channel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single
polarization.
Cross
polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)
to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization
waves in the CCDP.
D
DC-I A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-
circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Digital
modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and
frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.
In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Dual-polarized
antenna
An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent
radio waves orthogonally polarized.
E
Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can
compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
Bit error A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded
because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,
decided, and regenerated.
F
Forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to
the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the
bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Frequency
diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with
a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal
and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact
of fading.
G
D Glossary
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 487/496
Gateway
network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE
application layer and the NM application layer.
H
Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid
radio supports the AM function.
I
Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Internet Group
Management
Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent
multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Intermediate
frequency
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal
and an RF signal.
IGMP
snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This
protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and
analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between
hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data
on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
L
Layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet
switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.
Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data
forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located
on the NE management layer of the transport network.
Link
aggregation
group
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to
form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link
aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the
input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the
integrality of the transferred signals.
M
Multiplex
section
protection
The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal
between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description D Glossary
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 488/496
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment
to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes
MSTP.
N
N+1 protection A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and
one protection channel.
Network
element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software
running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board
which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software
runs on the system control Unit.
Network
managementsystem
The network management system in charge of the operation,
administration, and maintenance of a network.
Non-gateway
network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer
must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
O
Orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation
engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
Outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements
frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
P
Plesiochronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes
the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565
Mbit/s rates.
Polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector
is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the
electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this
electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric
field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,
this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of
the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Q
D Glossary
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
D-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 489/496
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It
encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)
into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to
travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer
2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
R
Rapid
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning
tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
compatible with the STP protocol.
S
Singlepolarized
antenna
An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagneticwaves.
Space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a
specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,
only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology
of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.
Subnet A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of
network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
Subnetwork
connection
protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced
by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Synchronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and
cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably
adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
U
U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can
support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can
manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a
unified manner.
V
Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network
segments or networks by using the network management software based
on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual
LAN.
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description D Glossary
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
D-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 490/496
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 491/496
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.
A
ADC Analog Digit Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASK Amplitude Shift Keying
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU Administrative Unit
B
BER Bit Error Rate
BIOS Basic Input Output System
BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BSC Base Station Controller
C
CAR Committed Access Rate
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CF Compact Flash card
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-1
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 492/496
CIR Committed Information Rate
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CoS Class of Service
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CVLAN Customer VLAN
C-VLAN Customer VLAN
D
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communications Channel
DCN Data Communication Network
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
ECC Embedded Control Channel
E-LAN Ethernet-LAN
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ERPS Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ES-IS End System to Intermediate System
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Frequency Diversity
FE Fast Ethernet
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIFO First In First Out
FLP Fast Link Pulse
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 493/496
FTP File Transfer Protocol
G
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GTS Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI Graphical User Interface
H
HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC High level Data Link Control procedure
HSB Hot Standby
HSM Hitless Switch Mode
I
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU Indoor Unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF Intermediate Frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO International Standard Organization
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
IVL Independence VLAN learning
L
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-3
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 494/496
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB LoopBack
LCT Generation-Local Craft Terminal
LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code
LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection
LPT Link State Pass Through
M
MA Maintenance Association
MAC Medium Access Control
MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
MBS Maximum Burst Size
MD Maintenance Domain
MDI Medium Dependent Interface
MEP Maintenance End Point
MIB Management Information Base
MP Maintenance Point
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
N
NE Network Element
NLP Normal Link Pulse
NMS Network Management System
NNI Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
NSAP Network Service Access Point
O
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description
E-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 495/496
OAM Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU Outdoor Unit
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
P
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR Peak Information Rate
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Q
QinQ 802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS Quality of Service
QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
R
RF Radio Frequency
RFC Request For Comment
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RMON Remote Monitoring
RNC Radio Network Controller
RS Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN Radio Transmission Node
S
SD Space Diversity
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
E-5
8/10/2019 IDU Hardware Description(V100R002C00_03).pdf
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/idu-hardware-descriptionv100r002c0003pdf 496/496
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SNC SubNetwork Connection
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SP Strict Priority
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STM Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N SDH Transport Module -N
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SVL Shared VLAN Learning
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
OptiX RTN 950
IDU Hardware Description